JP6966990B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A gaming machine, for example, a ball gaming machine, performs an internal lottery for a big hit and plays a symbol variation display game when the ball enters the starting port, and the result of the above internal lottery during the symbol variation display game. It is configured to entertain the game by displaying various notice effects that reflect the above. In this type of gaming machine, it is known that when a jackpot is won, after the jackpot game is completed, the gaming machine shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state or a probability change state (for example, Patent Document 1 below). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-239896

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition to the time saving state or the probabilistic state is limited after the big hit game, the degree of freedom of the game and the directing is poor, and the game is not interesting. In addition, if a player encounters a big hit (for example, even if the number of games played is twice or more the jackpot probability denominator, the jackpot is not won) by the time the jackpot is won, the player's willingness to play is significantly reduced.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from the jackpot winning.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) A launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area,
A starting means that can detect a game ball,
When the starting means detects a game ball, a lottery means for drawing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, and a lottery means.
Display means that can display variable patterns and
A gaming machine provided with a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition.
The means for generating a profit state is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, the hit game execution control means for controlling the execution of the hit game and the hit game execution control means.
After the winning game is completed, the first profit state generating means for generating the first profit state and the first profit state generating means.
After the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the second profit state generation means for generating the second profit state when the specific generation condition is satisfied without executing the hit game is provided.
The specific occurrence condition is different from the case where the number of times the symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times.
The first profit state is a profit state that continues for the first period, and is configured to be granted only once between winning games.
The second profit state is a profit state that continues for a second period shorter than the first period, is configured to be able to be granted multiple times between hit games, and is granted multiple times between hit games. Is also configured so that the total of the second period does not exceed the predetermined period .
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player from an opportunity different from the jackpot winning.

It is a front view which shows the appearance of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game board and a production button. It is a block diagram which shows the control device. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the hit type and the game state transition. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device. This is a game flow used to explain the game content (usually, time saving, ST mode). It is a game flow used to explain the game contents (precursor, ceiling, heaven mode). It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling function management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing front part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing post part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the effect control side. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table selection table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for a ceiling. It is a figure which shows the hit variation pattern distribution table (general, precursor, ceiling, heaven time saving). It is a figure which shows the variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, precursor, ceiling, heaven time saving). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage). It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game mode type, the internal game state type, the variation pattern distribution designation number, and the game state determination number. It is a figure which shows the effect example in ST mode which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect example in ST mode which concerns on the 1st modification of the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect example in ST mode which concerns on the 2nd modification of the same embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the look-ahead notice which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the modification of the privilege grant form. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the modification of the privilege grant form.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter, abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”), a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. If the other side is operated, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of the ball and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 has a push button type effect button 13 (first operating means) that also functions as an exhilarating button 70 described later, a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left. It is composed of buttons 75d, and is provided with a cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be input and operated in the up, down, left, and right directions. The effect button 13 or the direction key 75 functions as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, a so-called “player participation type effect”). If the reception of operation input is enabled during this valid period and a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the effect can be changed before and after the operation. It has become like. In addition, these operation means are the "game setting screen (volume setting, light amount setting, effect mode) related to the customer waiting standby (during the" demo start waiting effect "or" customer waiting effect (demo screen) "described later). It is also used when the player sets his / her favorite game on the menu screen) ”. The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside the effect button 13, and the operation reception valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and the operation are performed depending on the difference in the light emitting mode of the button LED 13b. It is possible to notify the reception invalid period (for example, when the light is off).

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided. The launching device 32 adopts a launching device having a launching performance of about 100 shots per minute.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a decorative lamp 45 (LED for directing) that exerts a light directing effect by decorating light is placed in an appropriate place of the gaming machine, for example, in the circumferential direction around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 or inside the center decorative body 48 described later. There are multiple.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area), such as numbers, characters, and symbols. , Middle symbol, right symbol (see FIG. 5)), including variable display operation (variable display and stop display), various effects are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decorative body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, forms the outer periphery of the front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and the center decorative body 48, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is distributed to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables this. In the present embodiment, a floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32. Is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). A second special symbol display device: a second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. In the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various notice effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol 1, the display of the operation-reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation-reserved balls of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function in operation (during time reduction), and This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions of state notification during a high-probability state (high-probability).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. In this right-handed display device 39b, it is advantageous to "right-handed" to aim the game ball to pass (flow) through the right flow path 3c by combining the lighting and extinguishing states of the LED, or the game ball is on the left. Notifies whether "left-handed" aiming to pass (flow) through the flow path 3b is advantageous. For example, when the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is advantageous to hit right, and when it is turned off, it is advantageous to hit left.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of the devices. Has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation (referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and is a "fixed winning rate type" that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "winning device". In the present embodiment, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that is difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening can be changed by the starting opening opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2" in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). (In some cases, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), it is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. Then, it is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) that makes it impossible to win a prize in the lower starting port 35.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, four general winning openings (43a to 43d) are arranged on the left side and one (43e) on the right side, for a total of five, and a game ball is arranged inside each of them. A general winning opening sensor 43h (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the above is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) composed of a passing gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally above the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. Has been done. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and not on the left flow path 3b side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both flow paths may be formed. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The periphery of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 that bulges from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of this bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game area above the large winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the large winning opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the third surface of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the large winning opening 50, and a gauge configuration (not shown) is further formed. (Arrangement of game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 is used. If is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the gaming ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult or not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

When the above-mentioned winning means belongs to either the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b. There are an upper start port 34, a lower start port 35, and general winning ports 43a to 43d on the left side, and the winning means belonging to the right flow path 3c include an upper start port 34, a lower start port 35, and a normal symbol start port. There are 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. The lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c if the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port open state), and a prize is awarded from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is operated by the passage (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially right-flowing. It can be said that it belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the large winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game ball from the right flow path 3c can win a prize.

(Right-handed advantageous configuration under specific conditions)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is "right-handed" aimed at passing through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, when the "electric support state (electric support state)" described later occurs, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state (normal gaming state). Therefore, if the ball is under non-electric support (without electric support), the game ball should pass through the left flow path 3b instead of the "right-handed" aiming at the right flow path 3c. "Left-handed" to aim is advantageous, while "right-handed" is advantageous instead of "left-handed" under the electric support state. That is, the game progress has an advantage or disadvantage for the player depending on which of the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, depending on the game state, the game ball is flowed down, and is either "left-handed" or "right". Which of the "hit" methods is advantageous for the player (the progress of the game is advantageous for the player) changes according to the game state, and is accompanied by a non-electric support state (for example). , "Left-handed" is advantageous in the normal state or latent state), and "right-handed" is advantageous in the gaming state (for example, time-saving state or probable change state) accompanied by the electric support state.

Each of the winning openings such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a, and also , The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper start opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game in which the ball is entered into the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a sphere. The number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot be won, or can be won is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each winning opening, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, there are 3 upper starting openings 34, 1 lower starting opening 35, 0 normal symbol starting openings 37 (without prize balls), 15 large winning openings 50, and 3 general winning openings 43a to e. Will be paid out. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a via the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this prize is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decorative body 48, and the second movable body accessory 90 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. The first movable body accessory 80 is a clock board portion 81 composed of a number display unit having numbers from the Roman letters “I” to “XII” and divided into 12 number sectors, and the clock face unit 81. Has a clock hand 82 composed of a minute hand and a minute hand rotatably formed, and forms a "wall clock unit" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable body accessory 80 is also referred to as a "clock-type accessory". The clock face portion 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED, and each number sector is independently and independently in a different color. It is configured to be able to emit light.

Further, in the second movable body accessory 90, a corolla composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is further arranged around the outer side of the corolla to double the perianth, thereby forming a flower shape. The flower-shaped portion 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of the arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole. The flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate around the center of the flower. The flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at an original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge inside the LCD screen or on the side outside the LCD screen, and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the arm 92 Tilts and moves together with the arm 92 to a position where the flower-shaped portion 91 covers the LCD screen (shown by a broken line in FIG. 2). Then, when the flower-shaped portion 91 is moved to the effect position shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petal portion can be illuminated beautifully by a lamp or a full-color LED from behind. .. When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its operation, it returns from the effect position of the broken line to the origin position of the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can have a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion, and the arm 92 has a predetermined tilting motion in addition to the fully open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilt motion that tilts to a tilt angle, a vibration motion in which the arm rattles, and a sizing motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice effect depending on the operation mode, and the setting suggestion described later. It is also used when producing a production.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as “main control unit 20”) that collectively controls control related to overall gaming motion (game motion control). And, the effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter, "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means. (Named), a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power source (including a backup power supply) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) to be supplied. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a fixed period, and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that demonstrates interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition functions such as timer interrupts, reset circuit that can detect when the power is turned on or off, power failure, etc., and output a system reset signal to reset the CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, and a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power supply abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown) to start a backup process prior to power cutoff. The game operation before the power is cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). The gaming machine 1 can retain the stored contents of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the goto action such as hitting.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are connected. The main control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the OUT monitoring switch. The detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control unit 20 includes a counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out balls depends on whether or not the starters 34 and 35 have won a prize if the player continues to launch the game balls from the launcher 32, that is, whether or not the symbol variation display game is executed. It will increase instead. Since the launching performance of the launching device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 rounds per minute, for example, if "today's cumulative number of out-balls is 30,000", it is said that the gaming machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes. Operation information (cumulative number of out balls (pieces) / firing performance (100 shots per minute). Therefore, the number of out balls (cumulative number of out balls) can be said to be one of the game performance information defined by a specific value. This out-ball number information is used for calculating the base value (one of the game performance information) described later.

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity against the gaming machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the fraud detection sensor. It is possible to monitor fraudulent activities against gaming machines based on the detection signal of.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. There is. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 is for displaying and controlling various information displayed on these devices. The control signal can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 transmits a signal (outer end signal) including predetermined game information via the frame external terminal board 21. It is possible to output to the outside of. The external terminal board 21 for the frame is configured to be connectable to a so-called "data counter DT" or "hole computer HC" provided outside the gaming machine, and is output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. The end signal is sent to the "data counter DT" or the "hole computer HC". As the outer end signal, the main control unit 20 may include, for example, a winning game start information, a winning information for a starting port (a change start information of a special symbol), a prize ball number information, and various security information (for example, fraud detection information, etc.). It is possible to output one or more outer end signals including RAM clear, setting change and other occurrence information). The data counter DT is, based on the information contained in the outer end signal, specific game information about the game machine (for example, the number of big hits, the number of games (number of fluctuations), the change start / stop information of the special symbol, the winning information, etc.). It is a game information notification device that can be notified, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC monitors and collects game information of the gaming machine based on the outer end signal output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame, and comprehensively monitors the operating status of the gaming machine installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the pachinko parlors that manage it.

Further, the main control unit 20 has a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key switch for switching to a setting change allowable state in which a setting value change operation described later can be performed. The 94, the setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value, and the setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 in the setting change allowable state are connected, and the main control is performed. The unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these switches.

In the case of this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push button type switches that can be operated by the operator. Further, the setting key switch 94 is a key switch that can be switched between a setting change allowable state (ON) and a setting change prohibition state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and performing an ON / OFF operation. It should be noted that these switches 95, 96, and 98 are formed in appropriate places inside the gaming machine from the viewpoint of preventing goto acts (illegal acts) such as an illegal change operation with respect to the set value, and the game is played unless the front frame 2 is opened. ON / OFF operation from outside the machine is impossible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the set value is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the setting display unit 20. .. The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, and the relay board (relay board for relaying the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: FIG. (Not shown), or an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

(About the set value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, PAYOUT rate) in stages. The above "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk based exclusively on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store).

The "set value" defines, for example, the lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage. The higher the set value, the higher the lottery probability (big hit) of the big hit. Winning probability) is set high, and it works in favor of the player. Such a set value can be provided with at least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value). In this embodiment, six setting values of settings 1 to 6 are provided. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, and setting 3 is 1/222. 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, and the like. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the machine discount becomes higher), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the "set value" is a value that defines the event that affects the machine discount for each stage, and means a value for the grade related to the susceptibility to a special event such as a big hit. That is, the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability and / or the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability can be configured to be different depending on the set value. When the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability variation function described later is activated), the probability can be increased to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/240 to 1/189 and the rate of increase is tripled, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/80 to 1/63.

Further, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. It may be configured to increase only the winning probability of a certain jackpot 1 to 3 (in this case, the winning probability is common to all the set values for the jackpot 4), or only a specific jackpot (for example, only the jackpot 1). ) May be configured to increase only the winning probability (in this case, the winning probability is common to all the set values for the jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the large hit described above.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by any other switch operation, the power is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned on in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched and displayed so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored in the set value storage area), and the predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203 is cleared. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated, and thereafter, the game is started under the fixed set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment includes a setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player based on the operation of a predetermined operation means. It is provided with a setting value setting means for setting a setting value selected by the setting value selection means.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent the goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance display 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period), and is connected to the main control unit 20. 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the display. The performance display 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are laterally arranged. This is mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) under the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation. This is information for investigating whether or not the original ball ejection performance of the gaming machine (designed ball ejection performance) is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on game performance". Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect described later. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is mounted in a place that is easily visible inside the gaming machine, for example, on a control board or a board case that protects the control board. Further, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 may also be used as the setting indicator 97.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (number of payouts in normal time) in the normal state (the probability of big hit lottery is low (normal probability) and the state without electric support described later) and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal). The number of outs during normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times multiplied by 100 (base value calculated by multiplying the number of outs during normal times ÷ the number of outs during normal times x 100). , The above-mentioned "performance information" is adopted, and this is displayed in a predetermined mode by the performance display 99. As for the base value, the value rounded to the first decimal place is displayed on the performance display 99. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , The base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and the measurement of the new base value is started again. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the cumulative number of outs measured during all game states (including during the winning game). The number of balls (number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program related to the display control and the base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are defined in an area (out-of-area memory) different from the area (in-area memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Further, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 has a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and information on a payout operation state to the main control unit 20 (). Status signal) transmission, etc. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to payout (“payout control command” for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29 when it is necessary to pay out the balls, while the main control unit 20 can send the payout control command. The payout control board 29 can transmit the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), a front frame 2 and / or a front operation panel. A door opening sensor 61 (ON when opened / OFF when closed) for detecting the open / closed state of No. 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 is detected by a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of the game ball, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting the game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling a payout motor 19c (a motor for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball) of the game ball payout device 19. ing.

The payout control board 29 indicates a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as a fullness detection sensor 60, a door open sensor 61, a supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and a ball counting sensor 19b as the above state signals. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "Supply out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, Abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout) Various status signals such as a "counting error signal" indicating "counting error signal" and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed can be transmitted to the main control unit 20. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 / front operation panel 7 is in the open state (door opening error) and whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal). The prize ball error) and whether or not the upper saucer 9 is full (ball jam error) are monitored.

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with an effect control RAM), an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating a fixed range of hard random numbers. Counter for 8 bits), interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. are provided to control the overall production operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that ticks the time, and is related to real-time time information and / or date (month, day, day of the week) such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). It works as a clock means to provide calendar information. Further, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and a soft random number generation means.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are reception of effect control commands from the main control unit 20, selection determination of effects based on the effect control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, and various types. Light emission control of the effect LED (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other effect LEDs), operation of various movable objects (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, beacon 62, movable body 73) Control etc.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit expands VDP, which controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (directed image data) that VDP performs image expansion processing, and VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned image display effect, the effect control unit 24 has an optical display including various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45, button LEDs 13b, and 62a in order to display a light effect, a sound effect, a movable body effect, and the like. An optical display control unit for the device 45a, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and a movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped portion 91, arm 92). It is equipped with a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the object motors 80c, 91c, and 92c.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, the effect control unit 24 monitors the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and if the malfunction occurs, performs a predetermined error notification process.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive the operation detection signal from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , Various effect patterns (variable display operation of decorative patterns, notice effect, etc.) are developed in chronological order, and a "effect scenario" in a broad sense is realized. Further, the effect control unit 24 responds to the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It is configured so that it can be identified whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up / down / left / right direction, etc.) (operation identification means), depending on the operation mode. It has a structure that can control the appearance of the production.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When transmitting this information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. Sends the strobe signal of. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol fluctuation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, that the gaming ball enters (wins) the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined time elapses, displays the result as a special symbol. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting opening 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start opening 34. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on condition that the game ball enters the lower start opening 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit". In the mode, if the big hit lottery result is "small hit", the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined "small hit" mode, and in other cases, in the predetermined "missing" mode. The game result (big hit lottery result) is derived by.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game of the above may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Further, unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol". It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing it from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, and the special symbol display device reflects the predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is "7") in the special symbol display device, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbol reflects "big hit" (hit symbol: for example, in each display area of "left", "middle", "right", three decorative symbols are "7" " 7 ”and“ 7 ”are displayed in the display mode).

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates and the open door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the game is played more than in the normal state. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening by the opening door 52b is until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) elapses, or the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is the maximum number of winnings (maximum number of winning balls). The winning area is opened or expanded until the entrance is opened by one operation of the accessory, or the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning opening: (for example, 10) is reached. A "round game", such as closing the big winning opening when any of the conditions is met (establishment of the round game end condition (closing condition)), is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, up to 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above-mentioned big hit game starts, an opening effect is performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, the round game is performed multiple times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (maximum number of rounds). Will be done. When the current round game is completed, the next round game is started via a predetermined interval time (integer between rounds). Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, the ending effect is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and a series of big hit games is completed. That is, the jackpot game is roughly classified into a game period including an opening period (start INT period), a round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and an ending period (end INT period). In addition, "in-round production" appears during the round game, and "inter-round INT production" appears during the round game (during the round-to-round INT).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a and the start condition (start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery for the lost type (if there is only one type of big hit, small hit or lost, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery, so omit the lottery. Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, the effect control unit 24 issues a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, the big hit lottery result, the information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, etc.). Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, in order to enrich the variation of the effect, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the variation pattern information of the above special symbol includes information that specifies the occurrence (execution) of a specific advance notice effect (for example, the reach effect type described later and the pseudo-ream effect (including the number of pseudo-reams)). And can include. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of the reach effect (including the specification of the reach type), "normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of the reach effect, and "pseudo-ream" that specifies the execution of the pseudo-ream effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as "with reach fluctuation pattern" and "pseudo-ream with normal fluctuation pattern" in which the execution of the pseudo-ream effect is specified and the execution of the reach effect is not specified. Further, with respect to the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern is basically set in order to secure the production time of the advance notice effect.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Decide the content of the effect (effect scenario) to be developed in the game, the decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), etc. Controls the appearance of variable display effects of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the one that reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display game". In addition, the number of executions (number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) is set to "number of symbol variation" or "number of variation" or "** rotation (for example, one rotation) for convenience of explanation. 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.) ".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol starting port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidiary winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the result is turned on and off by the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state).

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (opening operation), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting opening opening state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ), Or until the number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower start opening 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be open or expanded, and any of these conditions is satisfied. When it is full, the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. The lower starting port 35 can be opened once or a plurality of times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
In the present embodiment, when a prize is generated in each of the starting ports 34, 35 or the normal symbol starting port 37 during the symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, or the normal electric opening game, that is, If there is a detection signal input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition is satisfied, this is used as data related to the start right of the variable display game and changes. Except for those related to the display, the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, up to 4), which is a predetermined upper limit, is stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at a suitable position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation hold balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are reserved as the number of times the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or part of the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the following, each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol operation hold ball will also be referred to as a special figure 1 operation hold ball, a special figure 2 operation hold ball, and a normal figure operation hold ball, respectively.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the functions (means) related to the generation of various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability variation function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. .. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ depending on the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, changes from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function to generate a "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the normal electric open game frequently occurs. The operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variable time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for the loss change without reach). The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (It will be shortened), and the number of lottery times per auxiliary unit time will be improved compared to the normal state.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. This open extension function is a function to generate an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. Under the open extension state, the open operation period (start opening open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing thereof is, for example, once (open extension function). Is extended from 2 times (when the open extension function is operating) to 2 times (when the open extension function is operating), and the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Therefore, when the open extension function is activated, the frequency of winning the lower starting port 35 increases. Therefore, as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than the normal state. Compared to the state in which the opening extension function is not activated (non-operating), the gaming state is advantageous to the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric chew support state (electric support state)".

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to bring about a change in the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and at least the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated (in this embodiment, only the special symbol probability change function is activated). ) Is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state (normal probability)" and the gaming state becomes. In the case of "latent state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". In addition, during the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game occurs in which the big winning opening is opened and closed, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically, under the same game state as the above normal state. Placed in.

(High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function, operate at the same trigger. However, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol probability change function, ordinary symbol time saving function, and open extension function are individually focused on, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the above-mentioned movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the rate is improved and the frequency of winning the lower start opening 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit or the payout of balls It becomes a "high base game state (starting port entry advantageous state)" in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. In addition, the "high base game state" here means a game state when a function related to a normal symbol (at least one function of a normal symbol probability change function, a normal symbol time reduction function, and an open extension function) is activated, and is a special symbol. It is different from the game state when at least one of the special symbol probability change function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbol (special symbol probability variation function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability variation function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high probability state". When the above-mentioned special symbol time reduction function is activated, the special symbol time reduction state is set in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the open extension function is given is treated as the "high-base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player as compared with the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, when the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric chew support state" (hereinafter referred to as "no electric support state"). When the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state", it becomes "electric chew support state" (hereinafter referred to as "electric support state" or "electric support state").

(3-2-1. Internal gaming state (game status number YJ): FIG. 28)
Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determine the game state, these functions are added to the main control unit 20 side. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. The gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state". What kind of internal gaming state the current internal gaming state is is managed by using an identifier of "game status number YJ". For example, if the game state number YJ is "00H", specify "normal state", if it is "01H", specify "probability change state", and if it is "02H", specify "time saving state". In the case of "03H", specify "latent state".

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode: Fig. 28)
Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, one internal gaming state is further classified and managed. Details will be explained later, but for example, the normal state includes multiple types of normal states such as "general" and "precursor", and the probabilistic state includes multiple types such as "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST final stage". The probabilistic state of is included. These are managed as different gaming states by using an identifier of "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The substance of this variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode) used when selecting a "variation pattern distribution table" (see FIGS. 24 to 27 described later) corresponding to the current gaming state. Data that identifies).

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation patterns of the special symbol) are at least. It is determined in relation to the current game state (variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result. For example, when the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the general mode is specified, and when it is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is specified. Will be done. That is, even if the internal gaming state is the same "normal state", if the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the general mode is selected. When the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "01H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is selected (see S413, FIGS. 24 to 27, etc. in FIG. 12 described later). ).

Further, due to this, a plurality of types of "effect modes" related to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode are provided, and the effect control unit 24 side displays (executes) the effect under each effect mode. You can do it. The details of the effect mode will be described later.

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support, that is, "internal game" When focusing on the "state", the selection of the variation pattern corresponding to the different variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, "general" or "precursor", is selected for the variation pattern of the special symbol even though it is the same "normal state". It has become possible, and it has become possible to bring out an effect related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a time saving state, and a probable change state (see the column of "YJ" in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the type of the gaming state related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of the gaming state related to the "variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode" when focusing on the determination of the production, is different from the type of the internal gaming state. Many of them include "general", "precursor", "ceiling", "heaven", "time saving", "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST final stage" (see the "Tcode" column in FIG. 28).

In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "variation pattern distribution" focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the production). By managing the "designated number Tcode" as different, even if the internal gaming state is the same (for example, the normal state), different fluctuation patterns are distributed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the designated number Tcode (for example, general and precursor). Can be selected. As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a large change in the digestion time (variation time of the special symbol) of the symbol variation display game and the related effects, and under the same internal gaming state. The degree of freedom of the production is improved, and the variation of the production can be enriched.

Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, at least the gaming state related to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as "gaming mode" (see the column of "gaming mode type" in FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 28, this gaming mode corresponds to a gaming state corresponding to the “variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode and the gaming state number YJ (internal gaming state)”, in other words, the “gaming state captured as the entire gaming machine”. It can also be treated as ". For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may not be distinguished and may be simply referred to as a "gaming state". Further, the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as a "variable pattern selection mode (Tcode)", and is appropriately abbreviated as "Tcode".

<4. About hits>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining a hit type, a hit game operation mode, and a transition destination game state (transition destination game mode) after the hit game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a plurality of types of hit types such as probability variation big hit 1 to 6 and time saving big hit 1 to 2 are provided as the hit types of the big hit lottery target. These hits belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small hits) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) for performing the round game, and is specified. The combination of the special symbols of is displayed, or the game ball operates when it passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding the one that won the big winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating). .. In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing an electric support state (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal gaming state to another internal gaming state). ..

Therefore, when the small hit is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, so that the internal gaming state does not shift (the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is performed. I won't). In addition, in the hit game by the small hit (small hit game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, the round game like the big hit is not executed, but it looks like it depends on how the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined. It is possible to realize a "pseudo-round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed. The operation mode of the small hit game is basically the same as that of the big hit game except that the round game is not executed, and after the lapse of a predetermined start INT, the "opening / closing operation game" that opens the large winning opening is executed. Then, when the opening / closing operation game is completed, a series of small hit games are completed after a predetermined end INT. Such a small hit is a winning type that becomes a transition trigger (execution trigger) of a hit game (special game state) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening like a big hit. To be different.

Further, when the small hit is won, the transition of the internal gaming state is not performed, but the transition of the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. If such a transition mode is used, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after another big hit game are shifted to the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect is produced on both sides. You can stay in the production mode. In addition, it is also possible to shift from the first fluctuation pattern selection mode to the second fluctuation pattern selection mode or re-shift from the second fluctuation pattern selection mode to the first fluctuation pattern selection mode due to the small hit winning. Is. Although the "small hit" is not provided in this embodiment, one or a plurality of types of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability and the like. can.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variation jackpots 1 to 3 and the time saving jackpots 1 to 2 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 1 side, and the probability variation jackpots 4 to 6 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 2 side. It has become. The symbol lottery probability is as shown in the figure.

(4-2. About winning games)
Next, the contents of the winning game by each of the above-mentioned hits will be described.

The notations of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 and the time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 in the "hit content" column of FIG. 4 indicate the maximum number of rounds related to the jackpot, respectively. In each jackpot of the present embodiment, it is fully expected that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in one round game will reach the maximum number of winnings (10) in the large winning opening. (For example, 29.8 seconds) ”is a big hit. It is up to you to decide what kind of opening pattern the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game should be. For example, the opening pattern of the large winning opening related to at least a part of the round games (round games of a specific number of rounds) is set to "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the above long opening time. , It may be set to be a shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". In addition, during the maximum opening time, the large winning opening may be continuously opened, or an opening pattern with one or more closures (for example, "1.3 seconds opening + 0.5 seconds closing + 27 seconds opening"). May be. The profit status (profit degree) during the big hit game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is higher in the long opening than in the short opening. In the case of the present embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the number of maximum rounds, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game.

(4-3. Transition destination game state after hit game: Fig. 4)
Next, the game state (game mode) that is transferred after the end of each big hit game will be described. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / transition destination game state" shown in FIG. 4, the game state at the time of winning and the game state to be transferred after the winning game (transition destination game state) are set according to the hit type. The relationship is shown. In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is determined at least based on the jackpot type and the internal gaming state. Specifically, when a big hit is won, the game state after the big hit game is determined based on the game state (internal game state or game mode) at the time of winning and the winning big hit type. (See the game state transition table selection table of FIG. 21 and the game state transition table of FIG. 22, which will be described later). The "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the game mode (corresponding internal game state in parentheses), and the "destination game state" indicates the game mode of the transition destination (corresponding in parentheses). (Internal game state) is shown.

In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the internal gaming state that is transferred after the jackpot game will be described. Details of the transition mode of the game mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

(4-3A. If you win the time-saving jackpot (time-saving jackpot 1-2))
First, the case where the time-saving jackpot 1 (5R time-saving A) and the time-saving jackpot 2 (5R time-saving B) are won will be described. When these time-saving big hits 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to the "time-saving state (YJ = 02H)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are referred to as "time-saving jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger the transition to the time-saving state.

When the game shifts to the above "time saving state", the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variation) is continued until the specified number of times is completed, and a big hit (however, in the internal gaming state) is continued within the specified number of times. When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning (excluding small hits that do not trigger the transition), the game is shifted to the "normal state (YJ = 00H)" from the next game. In the case of the present embodiment, the target for counting the specified number of times is the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) (counting the number of STs described later). , The same applies to counting the number of ceiling games).

When the time saving jackpot 1 is won, the time saving number of times is set to 100 times (time saving A) as the above-mentioned specified number of times, and when the time saving big hit 2 is won, the time saving number of times is set to 50 times (time saving B). That is, the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 of the present embodiment are finite time-saving jackpots that give a finite number of time-savings. In addition, a big hit (infinite time saving big hit) may be provided so that the time saving state is continued until the next big hit winning (the number of time saving is infinite). Further, the time reduction jackpots 1 and 2 may be the same number of time reductions, or only one type of time reduction jackpot may be used.

(4-3B. If you win the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot 1-7))
Next, the case where the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 are won will be described.

When any of the probabilistic big hits 1 to 7 is won, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to the "probability change state (YJ = 01H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 are referred to as "probabilistic jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger the transition to the probabilistic state.

In the case of shifting to the above-mentioned "probability change state", the number of executions (number of symbol fluctuations) of the special symbol variation display game is continued until the predetermined number of times is completed, as in the case of shifting to the above-mentioned time saving state. It is a so-called "number-cut probability variation type (ST type (finite probability variation type)" in which the probability variation state ends when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big hit within the specified number of times. To be precise, after the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a gaming state (probability change state or latent probability state) accompanied by at least a high probability state, if the above specified number of times is completed without winning the jackpot, the high probability state is terminated. Let's shift the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times that this high probability state is continued is referred to as "ST number of times". Therefore, there are cases (probability change A described later) where the probability change state ends and shifts to the normal state (YJ = 00H) when the number of STs ends after shifting to the probability change state, and cases where the number of STs ends. In the case where only the high probability state ends, in detail, only the "special symbol probability change function" ends from the "special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function". This includes the case of shifting to the “time saving state (YJ = 02H)” (probability change B and probability change C described later).

In the probabilistic state of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of probable change states (probability change A, probable change B, and probable change C) having different ST times are provided, and probable change A, probable change B, and probable change according to the winning jackpot type. It is designed to be transferred to any of C. Although the details will be described later, when focusing on the game mode, the ST100 mode is used when shifting to the probability variation A, the ST75 mode is used when shifting to the probability variation B, and the ST25 mode is used when shifting to the probability variation C. The game mode is set to correspond to the probabilistic changes A to C (see FIG. 6).

(Probability change A, Probability change B, Probability change C)
The above-mentioned "probability change A", "probability change B", and "probability change C" will be described.

(B) Probability change A (ST100 mode)
Probability change A is a probability change state in which the number of STs is set to 100 times. In the present embodiment, when the probability change big 1, the probability change big hit 4, or the probability change big hit 7 is won, the game is shifted to the probability change A. In the case of shifting to probabilistic A, the "probability changing state" ends when the number of STs is 100 without winning the jackpot, and the internal gaming state is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game.
(B) Probability change B (ST75 mode)
The probability change B is a probability change state in which the number of STs is set to 75 times (the number of STs of the probability change B <the number of STs of the probability change A). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot 2 or the probability variation jackpot 5 is won, the process is shifted to this probability variation B. In the case of shifting to probability change B, if the number of STs is 75 without winning a big hit, the "probability change state" ends, and from the next game, the game is shifted to the "time saving state" of 25 times. Specifically, after shifting to the probability change state after the big hit game, when the predetermined number of STs is completed, only the high probability state is ended (special symbol probability change function is turned off), and the game state is changed to "low probability state + electric". It shifts to the "supported state", that is, the "time saving state" (here, the probability change B = "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times"). Then, when the number of time reductions of 25 times is completed without winning the big hit, the "time reduction state" ends, and the game shifts to the "normal state" from the next game. Therefore, the electric support itself is given 100 times as in the above-mentioned probability change A, but the above-mentioned probability change A is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the predetermined number of ST times. Is very different.
(C) Probability change C (ST25 mode)
The probability change C is a probability change state in which the number of STs is set to 25 (the number of STs of the probability change C <the number of STs of the probability change B). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot 3 or the probability variation jackpot 6 is won, the process is shifted to this probability variation C. In the case of transition to probabilistic C, if the number of STs is 25 without winning the jackpot, the "probability change state" will end, and from the next game, the game will be shifted to the "time reduction state" with 75 time reductions (here, the time reduction state). Probability change C = "ST count 25 times + time reduction count 75 times"). Then, when the number of time reductions of 75 times is completed without winning the big hit, the "time reduction state" ends, and the game shifts to the "normal state" from the next game. Like the probabilistic changes A and B, the probabilistic change C is also given 100 times of electric support.

It should be noted that the probability variation jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 are "pure probability variation jackpots (probability variation)" in that they are jackpots (probability variation time reduction jackpots) that give "probability variation state of a predetermined number of ST times + time reduction state of a predetermined time reduction number of times". However, in the present specification, it is treated as belonging to the "probability change jackpot" in that it first shifts to the probabilistic state. Therefore, to be precise, the probabilistic jackpot includes a "probability variation jackpot" that does not give a time saving state and a "probability variation time saving jackpot" that grants a time saving state.

The probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation C have the same number of times of electric support (the number of times with the electric support) (100 times), but at least one of the probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation C is different. It may be the number of electric support. For example, probability change A is electric support 200 times, probability change B is electric support 150 times, probability change C is electric support 100 times, probability change A is electric support 200 times, probability change B is electric support 150 times, probability change C is electric support 150 times. Can be times. Further, although the probabilistic change B and the probabilistic change C have been described as shifting from the probabilistic change state to the time saving state, the probabilistic change state alone may not shift to the time saving state, that is, the probabilistic change state may be accompanied by a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the probabilistic jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 may be defined as the same "probability variation jackpots" as the probabilistic jackpots 1 and 7 instead of the above "probability variation time short jackpots". Further, at least a part of the probability variation jackpot of the present embodiment may be a latent probability jackpot (a latent probability transition trigger jackpot). For example, the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 3 on the special figure 1 side can be set as latent probabilistic jackpots.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes related to the gaming state (internal gaming state and / or variable pattern selection mode), and these effect modes are related to the current gaming state. The production can appear. Each effect mode is basically configured so that transition control is possible between each effect mode according to the transition (update) of the game state. For example, a "normal effect mode" related to the "normal state", a time saving state. There are multiple types of production modes according to each game state, such as "time saving effect mode" related to the time saving state, "probability change effect mode (ST effect mode)" related to the probability change state, and "time saving effect mode" related to the time saving state. Has been done. In addition, in each effect mode, the background display (background effect) as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern is used so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the effect mode. The BGM is switched and controlled to the background display related to the gaming state. The details of each effect mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between the plurality of types of effect modes. Among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), the effect control unit 24 can specify an effect control command including information on the game state, specifically, the current game state, or the game state. The effect mode is manageable based on the information contained in a specific effect control command that specifies that is to be migrated. As a result, the effect control unit 24 manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side, and controls the transition from one effect mode to another effect mode according to the processing state. do. The specific effect control command described above includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, and a specific command (a big hit start command and a big hit end command) transmitted during a hit.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, the information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command), and various various related to the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled (preliminary performance appearance control means). The main role of the advance notice effect is to suggest the degree of expectation (well-known "winning expectation degree") of whether or not the winner is a winning type (notice), and the degree of expectation of occurrence of a specific advance notice effect (degree of expectation of occurrence of specific advance notice). Suggestions etc. Most of the advance notice productions work as "fanning effects" to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", "player participation type production", "look-ahead notice", etc. There are various advance notice effects (so-called step-up effects, cut-in effects, etc.) that occur either in duplicate) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state (so-called tempai state), and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result can be derived and displayed via the reach state. In some reach effects, when a specific reach effect appears, the winning expectation is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect (N reach (normal reach) appears). Called "SP reach (super reach)". SP reach has a relatively longer production time (variable time) than N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning, and usually goes through N reach. The above N reach and SP reach include a plurality of types of reach associated with the winning expectation.

When the game result is a hit, most of them are derived and displayed with a winning symbol (for example, a matching symbol) via this reach effect. That is, some kind of reach effect may appear in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbol. Therefore, for the player, whether or not the reach effect is generated is a clue to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, a plurality of types of "notice effects" are provided as an effect mode that announces (suggests) the possibility of a reach effect, in other words, an effect mode that can more clearly announce the degree of expectation of winning. This "notice effect" plays a role as a fan effect to announce the degree of expectation of winning, but there is a possibility that a specific effect (for example, reach effect or pseudo-ream) may occur, or a specific effect may occur. It also plays a role of deterministically notifying the occurrence. Therefore, for example, in the reach effect scenario, a certain advance notice effect may occur before the reach effect occurs, foretelling the possibility of the reach effect and also foretelling the winning expectation. In other words, the degree of expectation of winning is clarified more clearly when the reach effect is accompanied by other notice effects than when the reach effect is generated alone, and the player's sense of expectation of winning can be fueled. In addition, the advance notice effect may be generated by combining (simultaneously or overlappingly) one or more types of expected advance notice effects in relation to the jackpot lottery result, and by combining multiple types of expected advance notice effects. , A clearer expectation of winning is shown. For example, even if the low expectation notice production has a low winning expectation, if the high expectation notice production with a high winning expectation is combined, the winning expectation is further increased, and if a plurality of high expectation notice productions are combined. , Expectations for winning will increase dramatically.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
The "pseudo-ream" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (so-called "pseudo-variation") of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" is a display operation in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol variation display game, and the decorative symbol re-variation display operation is executed from the temporary stop state. A variable display mode that is repeated once or multiple times. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the rate of occurrence of "pseudo-ren" is set so that the degree of expectation of winning increases as the number of pseudo-variations increases. For example, the expectation of the occurrence of the advance notice effect (for example, SP reach) with a high expectation of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is twice than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is once. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario including a reach effect, the "pseudo-ream" is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect), and after performing one or more pseudo fluctuations. , The reach effect, which is the main variation, is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In the present specification, when referred to as pseudo-N, it means the total number of times of pseudo-variation M times and this variation. For example, when it is expressed as "pseudo 2", it means "pseudo fluctuation 1 time + main fluctuation", and when it is expressed as "pseudo 3", it means "pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation".

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
The "player participation type effect" is an effect mode belonging to the so-called "button notice effect", and is a predetermined operation (for example, once pressed, long) for the operation means (effect button 13 and / or direction key 75). When a push, repeated hits, etc. are performed, the content of the effect can be changed based on the operation content. In the player participation type production, an "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation appears during the predetermined button validity period, and the player operates the operation means during the button validity period. When the operation is performed, the effect being displayed changes to another effect (effect during operation) based on the operation content, and the winning expectation, winning, or setting suggestion information is changed according to the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation. Etc. can be notified. The effect control unit 24 is a function unit (operation) that sets an operation valid period (button valid period) in which the operation of the operation means is effective based on a predetermined setting condition (for example, a predetermined timing during the player participation type effect). Effective period setting means), pre-operation effect control means that can control the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button validity period, and a predetermined operation-time effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation valid period. It is equipped with an operation control means that can control execution.

(5-2-5. Pre-reading notice production)
The "look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "look-ahead notice") is an operation hold ball (undigested action hold ball) that has not yet been used for executing the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). , Mainly, the winning of the operation hold ball by using the hold display mode (hold change system look-ahead notice) and the effect in the symbol change display game (design change middle system look-ahead notice) that is executed first in chronological order. It is a production mode that can notify the degree of expectation in advance.

An outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5, including the pre-reading notice. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), the hold display area 76 for displaying the number of the special figure 1 operation hold balls and the number of the special figure 2 operation hold balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 to be displayed is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: "○ (white circle)" in the figure) or an extinguished state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending balls is notified by the dashed circle in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each hold display area 76, 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is displayed. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated reserved ball on the time axis among all the activated reserved balls in the reserved display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages (4). (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game in progress hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time. Depending on the gaming state (game mode or internal gaming state), for example, during the first gaming state (during the normal mode (normal state)), the display area of the hold display area 76 is emphasized more than the hold display area 77. In the second gaming state (for example, the time saving mode (time saving state) or ST mode (probability change state) described later), the hold display area is displayed. The display area of 77 can be displayed more emphasized than the hold display area 76. Further, during the first gaming state, both the hold display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed, and during the second gaming state, the hold display area 77 can be displayed preferentially.

When an operation hold ball is generated, as an effect control command, the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the number of existing operation hold balls including the operation hold ball generated this time) are input. A identifiable "hold addition command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 to be described later). Specifically, the look-ahead determination information includes a jackpot lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) or a fluctuation start, which is executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. It refers to the game information obtained when the fluctuation pattern of time is determined in advance. Therefore, this pre-reading determination information includes at least the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading winning result) information of the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and in addition, the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result and the fluctuation. The look-ahead determination result (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined depending on what kind of notice content is to be notified. For example, the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. .. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which "N reach 1" is specified at the start of fluctuation, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the reach type itself of "N reach 1", but the essence of "N reach". Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2) ”may be specified.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the look-ahead determination information included therein, the effect control process related to the "look-ahead notice" is performed as a part of the display control process related to the hold display. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed to draw a lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice, and if this is won, the effect scenario of the look-ahead notice is determined. Then, according to the scenario, a look-ahead notice according to the winning expectation is displayed. The winning probability of the pre-reading notice lottery is higher for the "big hit" than for the "missing", and for the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice occurs.

In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icon shown in Remark 3 of FIG. 29 described later, the icon of an alien shown in FIG. 32, and the like, etc. ), The hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice is, for example, from the white of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to the special hold colors and colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow of the notice display. A look-ahead notice (hereinafter referred to as "hold change notice") of the "hold change system" that changes to the hold display (special hold change display mode) with the mark is performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched holding ball of the holding display unit b1 is changed to the special holding display. Here, the display of the blue, green, red, and rainbow colors of the hold icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of this color, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is a big hit confirmed (correct) display. It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation). Therefore, this hold display unit serves as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold. However, when executing the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). However, this works as a means to generate a look-ahead notice effect. When a look-ahead notice occurs, if a high expectation notice (high number of pseudo-reams, SP reach, etc.) with a relatively high winning expectation occurs during the symbol fluctuation display game targeting the operation pending ball, the look-ahead notice occurs. Coupled with the content of the notice production, the expectation of winning will be further increased.

The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-reserved ball has been exhausted, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-reserved ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of displayed objects is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In addition, the special hold display is not limited to the case where it appears when a prize is won, and it is a normal hold display at the time of winning, but at a predetermined timing such as a shift display, the normal hold display may be changed to the special hold display. It can be changed to a special hold display with a relatively higher expectation of winning than the current special hold display (for example, changing from blue to a hold color of yellow or higher). Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the symbol variation display game of this time is used. A look-ahead notice (special hold display) for the operation hold ball may be notified to the player even during the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a look-ahead notice different from the above-mentioned pending change notice, the above-mentioned "design change middle system look-ahead notice (hereinafter referred to as" changing look-ahead notice ") can appear. This pre-reading notice during fluctuation can be executed in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games, and is, for example, a pre-reading notice that can be executed single-shot or continuously. In the variable look-ahead notice, when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening and the start condition is satisfied, the right to execute the symbol change display game related to the establishment of the start condition is temporarily reserved and stored, and the execution lottery of the variable look-ahead notice is made. (In this embodiment, a lottery independent of the execution lottery for the pending change notice) is performed. When executing the pre-reading notice during change (when the lottery is won), if there are multiple operating hold balls (hold memory) existing at that time, the symbol change display related to all or part of the hold memory The more the pre-reading notice is executed continuously in the game (the symbol variation display game related to the operation hold ball that is the target of this lottery may be excluded), the higher the expectation of winning. For example, if the operation hold ball that is the target of this lottery is the 4th operation hold ball, the 1st to 3rd operation hold balls stored earlier in chronological order will be in the symbol change display game. When it is provided, a dedicated effect is displayed by using one or more effect means during the symbol variation display game. In this case, the winning expectation is the highest when the pre-reading notice during fluctuation is continuously executed (three consecutive executions) in the first to third operation holding balls. The effect means used for the pre-reading notice during the change and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined. For example, in the case of an image display, a combination of a background display and a decorative pattern may be used, or a dedicated sound effect, a light effect, a movable body effect, or the like may be combined with the image display. It should be noted that the execution lottery for the pending change notice and the execution lottery for the pre-reading notice during the change are independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases where a pending change notice and / or a pre-reading notice during a change occurs.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative pattern or a notice effect, the operation holding balls of Special Figures 1 and 2 are displayed. A sub-display area 79 capable of displaying information on the number of balls on hold for normal map operation, information on the variable display operation of special figures 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the normal map is provided. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative symbol is hidden during the advance notice effect. Therefore, whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently in progress can be identified by the information in the sub display area 79.

(4-2-6. Setting suggestion production)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appear an effect mode (setting suggestion effect) that suggests information regarding the above "set value". For example, it is a setting suggestion effect as shown in (a) to (shi) below.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3, etc.).
(Sa) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used). For example, "setting N confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal set value deterministically. The reason is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting area, such as setting 1 and setting 2 confirmation, reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to deterministically notify any one of the settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(M) A "specific setting denial effect" that deterministically notifies that the value is not a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, it suggests settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β), suggests settings 4 or more (α ≤ set values), and suggests a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6”. .. Also, by making the appearance rate different according to the set value, it is suggested that the possibility of a certain set value is high / low, for example, it is difficult to appear in setting 1, moderately appears in setting 4, and easy to appear in setting 6. It is possible to do.

Such a setting suggestion effect can appear at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with or independently of the advance notice effect. For example, an item or character corresponding to a set value may appear. Further, by determining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to the set value, the advance notice effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, by making the appearance rates of a specific SP reach, a specific number of pseudo-reams, a specific player participation type effect, a specific look-ahead advance notice, etc. different according to the set value, the advance notice effect itself can be used as a setting suggestion effect. By making it function, it is possible to give the player a guessing element of the set value. For example, if SP reach C is likely to appear at the time of loss, high setting rich, if it is lost, pseudo-ream 4 times fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation 3 times + main fluctuation) is likely to appear, high setting rich, specific button operation effect If appears, it means "setting 6 confirmation suggestion" or the like. In addition, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the symbol variation display game, but also appears in the "demo start waiting effect" and "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described later during the big hit game and waiting for the game to start. It is possible. Further, the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes lower as the set value is relatively lower.

<6. Directing means ＞
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are manifested by the effect means arranged in the gaming machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual sense, auditory sense, and tactile sense, and may be a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), Sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, vibration device that gives vibration to the player. (For example, the firing operation handle 15 trembles), a wind pressure device that gives wind pressure to the player's body, or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the visual sense like the image display device (image display means), but is different from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. Included in.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the contents of the “game mode” related to the variation pattern selection mode and the transition control between the game modes (between the game states) will be described. 6 and 7 are game flows showing an outline of the game mode and the effect mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a plurality of types of game modes such as general, precursor, ceiling, heaven, and ST (early stage of ST, middle stage of ST, final stage of ST) are provided, and these games are provided. The progress of the game is controlled under the mode.

(7-1A. About "normal mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state, and this normal mode is initially started when the RAM is cleared (for example, when the RAM is cleared, when the setting is changed, etc.). It is in the game mode of.

This normal mode includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "precursor mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "01H". The "general mode" is a game mode in which the player can stay for the longest time while the game is in progress. Basically, the game mode is changed to another game mode (ST mode, time saving mode, etc. described later) by winning a big hit from this general mode. Will be done.

(7-1A-1. About the production in the general mode)
During the general mode, the mode shifts to the "general effect mode" that produces an effect related to the general mode. The general effect mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general effect modes. For example, a player operates an operation means (effect button 13 or direction key 75) while waiting for a customer to obtain a preferred mode. It is possible to switch to the general production mode. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the block frame of the normal mode of FIG. 6, "normal mode (normal A effect mode)", "simple mode (normal B effect mode)", and "premium mode (normal B effect mode)". It is possible to select one of the three types of effect modes (player selectable effect mode). However, it should not be confused that these effect modes are the effect modes under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H), and the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. Does not mean. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, the effects that appear may differ, but the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern distribution table) that is internally selected does not change, so the symbol variation display game. Time (variation time of special symbol) itself does not change.

The "normal mode" is the default effect mode, and the "simple mode" is the effect mode in which the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect is low or does not appear at all (appearance rate 0%) as compared with the normal mode. (Specific notice effect appearance rate change mode).
In the "simple mode", for example, (a) a specific high expectation notice with a relatively high winning expectation (for example, a winning expectation of 30% or more in the normal mode) has a higher appearance rate at the time of loss than in the normal mode. The probability is low, and when the specific high expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the excitement when the high expectation notice appears is increased. In addition, (b) the appearance rate of a specific low expectation notice (for example, a production with a winning expectation of less than 30% in normal mode, a look-ahead notice) with a relatively low winning expectation is lower probability (0%) than in normal mode. (Including), there is little excessive fanning effect (effect at the time of loss), and simple effect is suitable for players who like it. In addition, (c) the appearance rate of the player participation type production is lower than that in the normal mode (including 0%), and the appearance rate of the production accompanied by the production button operation is low, so a calm game is a favorite game. Suitable for people.
In the "premium mode", the appearance rate of the winning production (the production with a rich jackpot winning (for example, the winning expectation of 90% or more) or the production with the confirmed winning of the jackpot) has a higher probability than in the normal mode and the simple mode, and 1 or The appearance rate of multiple types of specific low expectation notices has a low probability (including 0%). Therefore, it is a production mode suitable for a player who wants to enjoy the appearance of a premium production that can foretell the accuracy.
In any of the normal, simple, and premium production modes, the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effects may be the same probability or different probabilities.

In addition, in each of the normal, simple, and premium production modes, it is possible to identify which mode is being used, so that a unique production corresponding to each production mode appears. Specifically, an image display effect (for example, a background image (background display), a character appearing at the time of a preview effect, a decorative pattern, etc.), a sound effect (for example, BGM, a sound effect), and a light effect (for example, a specific effect). At least one of the light emitting modes of the effect LED) changes according to each effect mode. This makes it possible to identify whether the production mode is normal, simple, or premium. In this embodiment, a "daytime background image" in which the sun shines is used as a base in the general mode, and a background image (for example, a background image including a cherry tree or the like) reminiscent of the season "spring" in the "normal mode". In "Simple mode", a background image reminiscent of the season "summer" (for example, a background image including the sea and sandy beach), and in "Premium mode", a background image reminiscent of the season "Autumn" (for example, a background including autumnal mountains and trees). It is controlled by switching to at least a background display (background effect) corresponding to each effect mode such as an image). It should be noted that, under other game modes, it is possible to switch between at least two production modes of normal, simple and premium modes. Also in this case, as described above, it is possible to make a configuration in which it is possible to distinguish which mode is in effect.

(7-1B. Precursor mode)
Further, the above-mentioned "precursor mode" is a game mode in which the later-described "ceiling (hamari relief function)" is shifted to near arrival, and for example, a "precursor effect" for notifying that the ceiling is approaching is executed. It is provided as a game mode for. This precursor mode is shifted to the case where the predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning the jackpot during the normal mode (normal state). In the case of the present embodiment, if 989 games are addicted to the general mode, the game shifts to the precursor mode from the 990th game (see the block frame (α) of the “precursor mode” in FIG. 7). The details of the "ceiling" will be described later, but in this embodiment, when 1000 games (1000 rotations) are addicted (continue to lose) in the normal mode (at least the internal gaming state is in the normal state), the ceiling function is activated. Extraordinary benefits (ceiling benefits) are granted (see the column of examples of ceiling benefits in Remark 2 in Fig. 7).

(7-1B-1. About the production in the precursor mode)
During the precursor mode, the mode shifts to the "precursor effect mode" that performs the effect related to the precursor mode (precursor effect). During the precursor mode, the "daytime background image" in which the sun shines in the general mode is switched to the "night background image" in which the stars shine, and the display is displayed to notify that the precursor mode is in effect. Further, even during the precursory effect mode, it is possible to switch to either normal / simple / premium mode (see the block frame (γ) of the precursory mode in FIG. 7). Further, during the precursory effect mode, a countdown display appears, for example, as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) in which the number of remaining games (number of remaining ceilings) until reaching the ceiling can be identified (in the precursory mode of FIG. 7). See block frame (δ)). This residual ceiling number display effect may appear during a part of the precursor mode, and for example, the residual ceiling number display effect may be started (countdown display start) from the 996th game near the ceiling. For example, a countdown display (for example, suggesting a count of zero in a ceiling game) can be performed between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 to 1000 games including a ceiling game in consideration of the maximum number of reserved memories of 4. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a dramatic merit that the player can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling arrives.

Further, during the precursor effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from that of the general mode appears. For example, in the general effect mode, the hold display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. 5, but in the precursor effect mode, the hold display mode is based on the "character icon". (See the block frame (ε) in the precursor mode of FIG. 7, FIG. 32). In the general mode, one or more hold displays that exist immediately before the transition to the precursor mode (989th game) are all changed to the dedicated hold display (character icon) after the transition to the precursor mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the hold display to be digested may be changed to the dedicated hold display during the precursor mode. To specifically explain the latter configuration, for example, in the case where there are three operation hold balls during the execution of 988 games, the hold display related to the 989 games to the 991 games is displayed as a "'round icon (in general mode). Digestion target hold: 989th game) "" Character icon (digestion target hold in precursor mode: 990th game) "" Character icon (digestion target hold in precursor mode: 991th game) "". In addition, from the start of the precursor effect mode until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the hold display (round icon) is the same as in the general effect mode, and the ceiling is about to be reached (for example, considering the maximum number of hold storages of 4, 996). (Between games and 999 games), you may switch to the hold display (character icon) dedicated to the precursor. Further, during the precursor effect mode, the above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" and / or "hold display dedicated to the precursor" may be displayed.

(About selection of normal / simple / premium mode in precursor mode)
It has been explained that it is possible to switch to either "normal / simple / premium mode" during the precursory effect mode of the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching is impossible (under the non-switchable state). It may be configured as such. That is, during the precursor effect mode, the effect mode in which the player can be selected can be fixed. For example, it can be fixed to the effect mode that was selected in the general mode, or it can be forcibly fixed to one of the normal / simple / premium modes (for example, the default normal mode). (The same applies to the heaven mode described later). In this case, the phenomenon that the effect mode, which was switchable in the general mode, becomes unswitchable can give the player a sense of discomfort and make the player aware that the ceiling is about to be reached. In particular, when the precursor mode and the general effect mode are kept secret (for example, the precursor mode and the general effect mode have a common background image, the effect mode common to the precursor mode and the general mode). (Internally, the precursor mode is the precursor mode, but the effect mode is the general effect mode), and the precursor mode itself is not provided. It is possible to notify that (ceiling game) is approaching.

(7-2. About "ST mode")
The ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a probable change state (YJ = 01H), and in this ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "02H", "ST early mode", and "ST mode". The "ST middle stage mode" of "03H" and the "ST final stage mode" of "04H" are included. This ST mode shifts to the case where one of the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of the present embodiment, the game mode is changed to any of the above-mentioned "probability A" to "probability C" depending on which of the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won, so that the game mode transition mode is also different. Specifically, it is the transition form of the following (A-1) to (A-3).

(A-1: When the probability variation C (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times) is given to the probability variation jackpot 3, 6 (5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST25) is won)
If one of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 6 is won, the process is shifted to "probability variation C" as already explained in FIG. 4, and "ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times" is given. In this case, the transition mode of the game mode is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (in the early stage of the ST number of times) and stay in the "time reduction mode" until the 26th to 100th games (within the time reduction number of times). It has become. Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode that is transitioned when the probability variation jackpot 3 or 6 is won is also referred to as "ST25 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: When the probability variation B (75 ST times + 25 time reductions) is given to the probability variation jackpots 2 and 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75))
If any of the probabilistic jackpots 2 and 5 is won, the game is transferred to the above-mentioned "probability variation B", and "ST number 75 times + time reduction number 25 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (ST middle stage) and to the 26th to 75th games (ST middle stage). It is designed to stay in the "time saving mode" until the 76th to 100th games (within the time saving number of times). Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode that is transferred when the probability variation jackpot 2 or 5 is won is also called "ST75 mode". (See FIG. 4).

(A-3. If you win the probability variation A (ST count 100 times), the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 (5R probability variation ST100), 10R probability variation ST100, special 7R probability variation))
If any of the probabilistic jackpots 1, 3 and 7 is won, the game is transferred to the above-mentioned "probability change A" and "ST count 100 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (ST middle stage) and to the 26th to 75th games (ST middle stage). Stay in the "ST end mode" until the 76th to 100th games (the end of the ST number). Focusing on this series of transition forms of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST final stage mode (ST 25 times)", the game mode that is transferred when the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 is won Is also referred to as "ST100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Probability change A to Probability change C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) consecutive villa performance)
Since the "ST number" differs depending on which of the above probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, whether the probabilistic variation A to the probabilistic variation C is transferred to, the state with electric support in the probabilistic variation A to the probabilistic variation C ( The pullback rate (so-called "ream villa rate") of the jackpot in the probable change state or the time saving state is also different. That is, the advantage to the player (profit state (profit degree) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability), the consecutive villa rate of probability change A (ST number of times 100 times), that is, the consecutive villa rate during ST is about 79.8%. .. In addition, the rate of consecutive villas in Probability B (“75 ST times + 25 time reductions” electric support 100 times) is about 70% for ST middle villas and about 12.4% for time reductions. The overall rate of consecutive villas (75 STs + 25 time reductions) is about 73.6%. In addition, the rate of consecutive villas in Probability C (“25 ST times + 75 times of time reduction”, 100 times of electric support) is about 33% for ST middle villa rate, about 32.8% for time reduction middle villa rate, and so on. The overall rate of consecutive villas (with electric support) is about 55%. In addition, the rate of consecutive villas in the case of a short-time big hit (the rate of consecutive villas in a short time) is about 41.2%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of probabilistic jackpots having different ST times are provided, it is possible to make the degree of consecutive villas during ST different depending on the winning jackpot type. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the number of times with electric support (number of times of electric support) is the same (for example, 100 times), but the number of STs is different (for example, ST25 times, ST75 times, ST100 times). The degree of profit and the degree of consecutive villas while there is electric support can be greatly different depending on the winning jackpot type. As a result, the degree of freedom in playability is increased, and the fun of the game can be further improved. In addition, the degree of freedom of the effects related to the ST mode (ST effect mode described later) is also improved, and the effects can be made various.

(72-1-1. Fluctuation state of ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage)
As described above, the "ST early stage mode", "ST middle stage mode", and "ST final stage mode" have different variable pattern selection modes (Tcodes) (see FIG. 28). As a result, the variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode can be selected, so that each ST mode can create a characteristic ST mode. For example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the ST early stage mode, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected with high probability, and in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the ST middle stage mode, the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is high. The average fluctuation time (variation) of the special symbol related to each ST mode is selected by probability, and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected with high probability in the fluctuation pattern distribution table in the ST mode. Pattern variation time), in other words, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time of the symbol variation display game per game or the number of executions of the symbol variation display game per unit time: (Also called "digestion time") can be slowed down. The average digestion time (average digestion time) of the above-mentioned symbol variation display game is at least the average digestion time at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the loss variation pattern" in each ST mode.

In the case of the present embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time related to the ST mode is defined to satisfy "ST final stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST early stage mode" (see FIG. 27). That is, the ST early stage mode is controlled under "high speed fluctuation state (fastest in all game modes (average digestion time shortest)"), the ST middle stage mode is controlled under "medium speed fluctuation state", and the ST end stage mode is controlled under "low speed fluctuation state". .. As long as the average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode satisfies the above-mentioned relationship of "ST final stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST early stage mode", the time is not particularly limited. However, the ST mode is a game mode related to the probability change state, and since the "special symbol time saving function" operates during the ST mode, any change state is at least a symbol change display game than the normal mode (normal state). The average digestion time is short. Each of the above-mentioned fluctuation states (high-speed, medium-speed, and low-speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) that emphasizes playability, such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency of the progress of the game". During the ST mode (probability change state), it becomes "electric support state + high probability state (special symbol probability change function operation) + special symbol time reduction state (special symbol time reduction function operation)", and at least the symbol fluctuation display game compared to the normal mode. The average digestion time of the game is relatively short, and the game is designed to make it easier to win big hits. However, in such a game state, some players may enjoy the production. Many players want to get a big hit as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the ST early stage mode, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, and a “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated.

On the other hand, under the "medium speed fluctuation state" or "low speed fluctuation state" in which the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected with respect to the above "high speed fluctuation state", the average of the symbol fluctuation display game is Although the digestion time is longer than that in the "high-speed fluctuation state", it is possible to take a longer production time instead, which is useful for a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production".

(72-2-2. About the production in ST mode)
As described above, the ST mode according to the present embodiment includes "ST early stage mode", "ST middle stage mode", and "ST final stage mode". Therefore, as the production mode (ST production mode) corresponding to these ST modes, the production related to the "ST early stage" (ST early stage production) appears and is related to the "ST early stage production mode" and the "ST middle stage". There is a "ST mid-stage production mode" in which the production to be performed (ST mid-stage production) appears, and a "ST final stage production mode" in which the production related to "ST final stage" (ST final stage production) appears. ing.

(7-2-3. Production example in ST mode: Fig. 29)
FIG. 29 shows an example of the effect in the ST early stage effect mode, the ST middle stage effect mode, and the ST end stage effect mode.

With reference to FIG. 29, the "ST early stage production mode" according to the present embodiment is a "underwater acoustic battle mode" that expresses a battle between submarines, and the "ST middle stage production mode" is a battle between fleets. The "water battle mode" and "ST final stage production mode" that express the production are "land battle mode" that express the battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three, ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage, according to the number of remaining STs, and which of these three ST divisions stays is mainly used as the ST division effect. In addition, the player is notified by the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of the fluctuation state such as high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and the accompanying effect (switching of background effect, advance notice effect, etc.). In addition, the display of "right-handed ⇒" in the figure is a launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) for urging the player to right-handed. Further, the hold icon is shown only in the effect example (effect example related to ST100 mode) in the figure (a), and (b) and (c) are omitted.

Regarding the "ST division production" that divides the production mode during the ST period, the underwater acoustic battle mode is available in each of the "ST early stage production mode", "ST middle stage production mode", and "ST final stage production mode". , It is switched to the battle mode production such as the naval battle mode and the land battle mode, and it is notified that the number of STs is gradually approaching the final time.

In the present embodiment, regardless of which of the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the effect mode is started from the "underwater acoustic battle mode" of the ST early stage effect mode. That is, the ST early stage effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown in the figure. However, each ST mode has a different transition form of the game mode, and accordingly, the transition form of the effect mode also differs.

(In ST25 mode: Fig. 29 (c))
In the case of the ST25 mode (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times), as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the player stays in the ST early stage effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) between 1 to 25 games. Then, when the 25th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is changed from the ST early stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the time saving production mode (fighters). (The details of the time-saving mode and the time-saving production mode will be described later). In this time-saving production mode (air battle mode), the player stays for 26 to 100 games (time-saving final game). Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the time saving mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Along with this, the effect mode also changes from the time saving effect mode to the normal effect mode. It shifts to (general production mode) (the same applies to ST75 mode described later).

(In ST75 mode: Fig. 29 (b))
In the case of the ST75 mode (ST number of times 75 times + time reduction number of times 25 times), as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the player stays in the ST early stage effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) between 1 to 25 games. When the 25th game is over, the game mode is changed from the ST early stage mode to the ST middle stage mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the ST middle stage production mode (naval battle mode). Then, until the 75th game, he stays in this ST midfield production mode (naval battle mode). Then, when the 75th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is changed from the ST middle stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST middle stage production mode (naval battle mode) to the time saving production mode (air battle mode). Will be migrated. In the case of the ST75 mode, the player stays in this time saving effect mode (air battle mode) for 76 games to 100 games (time saving final game).

(In the case of ST100 mode: Fig. 29 (a))
In the case of the ST100 mode (ST number of times 100 times), as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the above-mentioned ST75 mode is the same game mode and effect mode transition up to the 75th game. However, after the 75th game, the game mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode and the ST final stage mode, and along with this, both the production mode and the production mode are changed from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the ST final stage production mode (land battle mode). Will be migrated to. In the case of the ST100 mode, all 100 games until the end of the electric support state are in ST (probability change), and this land battle mode is a special production mode that occurs only in the ST100 mode. Also, in the case of ST100 mode, the background is switched sequentially in all sections of ST mode, so the player's tension is that the production mode is underwater acoustic battle (ST early stage), surface battle (ST middle stage), land battle. It becomes stronger every time you switch to the mode (late ST), and becomes the strongest when you reach the land battle mode at the end of ST. Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the ST mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Along with this, the production mode also changes from the ST final stage production mode to the normal production. It shifts to the mode (general production mode).

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which big hit is won, the game starts from "ST early stage mode + ST early stage production mode". That is, regardless of the transition destination game state (probability change A to probability change C) of the big hit game, in other words, regardless of the initial remaining ST number of times (the number of STs given), the start effect mode after the big hit game (initial). The production mode) is common.

(Modification example related to ST mode: FIG. 30, FIG. 31)
The transition of the ST mode and the ST effect mode in the progress of the game is not limited to the above embodiment (FIG. 29), and can be configured to follow the transitions shown in the following modifications 1 and 2. Hereinafter, modifications 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31.

(Modification example 1: FIG. 30 related to ST mode)
FIG. 30 shows a modification 1 according to the ST mode of the present embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 30, the hold icon corresponding to the effect mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31 described later).

In the case of this example (modification example 1), the ST mode is also divided into a plurality of ST modes, but the start effect mode differs according to each ST mode (according to the winning jackpot type), and according to the remaining number of STs. , It is designed to start from a different production mode.

With reference to FIG. 30, in the case of the ST100 mode, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29 (a)) is followed.

However, in the case of the ST75 mode (75 STs + 25 time reductions), paying attention to the fact that the initial remaining STs are 75, as shown in Fig. (B), the following mode transitions ( ST mode, transition of corresponding production mode) is to be followed.
"Between 1 and 25 games": "ST midfield mode + ST midfield production mode (naval battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 75 games": "ST final stage mode + ST final stage production mode (land battle mode)"
"Between 76 and 100 games": "Time saving mode + Time saving production mode (air battle mode)"

Further, in the case of the ST25 mode (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 50 times), paying attention to the point that the initial remaining ST number is 25 times, as shown in Fig. (C), the following mode transition is performed. It is designed to be traced.
"Between 1 and 25 games": "ST final stage mode + ST final stage production mode (land battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 100 games": "Time saving mode + Time saving production mode (air battle mode)"

In the case of this example, the "ST early stage mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle stage mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. The ST final stage mode exists in common in each ST mode. This example differs from the above embodiment in the following points.

In the case of this example, focusing on the fluctuation state, in the ST75 mode, since the ST75 mode is started from the ST middle stage mode (naval battle mode), the fluctuation state is started from the “medium speed fluctuation state”. Further, in the ST25 mode, since it is started from the ST final stage mode (land warfare mode), the fluctuation state is started from the “low speed fluctuation state”. That is, in the case of this example, as the initial number of STs is relatively small, the game mode in which the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is slower is started. Therefore, since the section (between 1 to 25 games) corresponding to the "high-speed fluctuation state" in the early stage of ST of the above embodiment is the section of the medium-speed fluctuation state or the low-speed fluctuation state, even when the number of STs is small. There is no fear that the ST period will end in a blink of an eye, and there is an advantage that the ST period can be enjoyed for a long period of time.

(Modification Example 2: ST Mode: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows a modification 2 of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. This example is started from the common "ST effect mode" regardless of the number of STs, and when the time saving state is changed, the time saving mode is changed. In the figure, an example starting from the ST middle stage mode is typically shown.

In the case of this example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31B, all of the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes have a common ST mode and ST effect mode (naval battle mode). That is, the fluctuation pattern selection mode is the same during the ST mode (in this example, “03H” in the ST middle mode), and at least the fluctuation state (average digestion time) does not change according to the number of remaining STs. In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-described embodiment and the first modification. However, in the case of ST25 mode or ST75 mode, when the number of STs is completed, the ST mode is switched to the time saving mode (the variation pattern selection mode is updated to the time saving mode "05H"), and the effect mode is accompanied by this. Also shifts from the ST midfield production mode to the reduced working hours production mode. In other words, in the case of ST25 and ST75 modes, there is a transition of the game mode (variable pattern selection mode) in the state with electric support, and in the case of ST100 mode, the game mode (variable pattern selection mode) in the state with electric support occurs. ) Does not occur.

In the case of this example, since the ST effect mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of STs, for example, the number of STs is relatively small such as "5 times, 10 times, 15 times" (low ST probability change state). It is suitable when a plurality of types are provided. This is because when the number of STs is small, if the effect mode or the variation pattern selection mode is changed indiscriminately, the player feels rather annoyed.

In the ST mode, the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" described in the normal mode may be non-switchable, or the player can switch between the normal mode and the normal mode. (The same applies to other game modes (time saving mode and heaven mode described later)). In the case of a switchable configuration, in each of the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" production modes, a specific color (for example, a dark type) is set so that the background image color becomes darker in this order. The display color and pattern of the weapon image (submarine, ship, tank, fighter (in the case of the time saving production mode described later)) related to each ST mode can be changed to the normal / simple / premium mode. It is possible to perform display processing such as changing in each effect mode so that it is possible to identify which effect mode is switched to. In addition, how to determine the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is free. In this embodiment, the relationship of "ST final stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST early stage mode" has been described, but it may be configured as the variable state of the first and second modifications, or "ST early stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST final stage". Like the relationship of "mode", the fluctuation state may be relatively slowed down according to the number of STs.

The following configurations (1) to (10) can be adopted for the "residual ST number notification effect" for notifying the remaining ST number of times and the "residual electric support number notification effect" for notifying the remaining electric support number.
(1) In any of the ST effect modes (each ST mode), the "residual ST number of times notification effect" and / or the "residual power support number notification effect" can be displayed.
Further, (2) When the remaining ST number notification effect is displayed, the remaining ST number of each effect ST mode may be notified. For example, if you are in the ST early mode, the countdown is displayed from the remaining 25 times, if you are in the ST middle mode, the countdown is displayed from the remaining 50 times, and if you are in the ST final mode, the countdown is displayed from the remaining 25 times. And so on.
Further, (3) a configuration in which the residual ST number notification effect is not displayed (a configuration in which the remaining ST number cannot be grasped) may be used. In this case, only the residual power support number notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (4) the residual ST number notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the start of ST. For example, the countdown display may be started 5 games before the end of ST.
Further, (5) the residual ST number notification effect may appear only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be any of ST25, ST75, and ST100, but the player tends to enjoy the game while paying attention to the number of remaining STs, so in ST75 or ST100 mode other than ST25 mode. It is preferable to make it appear.
Further, (6) the residual ST number of times notification effect may be displayed during the ST effect mode (ST mode), and the residual power support number notification effect may be displayed during the time reduction effect mode (time reduction mode).
Further, (7) the residual ST number notification effect and the residual power support number notification effect are not separately displayed, but may be, for example, an effect mode in which the countdown display is also used. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display is set to "white" in ST mode and "red" in time saving mode, or in ST mode, a predetermined effect image ((( For example, the display is provided with lights (glow effect and shadow effect), gradation, blur, and appropriate effect image processing such as embossing), but no effect is used during the time saving mode.

(7-3. About "time saving mode")
Returning to the description of FIG. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the time saving state (YJ = 02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of “05H”. In the time saving mode, in addition to the case where the time saving jackpot 1, 2 (5R time saving A, 5R time saving B) is won, the probability variation jackpot 2, 3, 5, 6 (5R probability variation ST75, 5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation) This is a game mode in which the game mode is changed even after the number of STs is completed when the player wins ST25) or the like. After the time reduction mode ends (after the time reduction number ends), the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (see the thick upward arrow in the block frame of the time reduction mode in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Fluctuation state during time saving mode)
During the above time saving mode, there is a "low probability (special symbol probability change function not activated) + electric support + special symbol time saving state", but the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is high speed related to the above ST mode. It is up to you whether the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as the fluctuation state, the medium speed fluctuation state, or the low speed fluctuation state, or the fluctuation state has a different average digestion rate. However, the point that the time saving mode is also shifted from the ST mode, specifically, in the case of the ST25 mode, the transition from the "ST early stage mode (high-speed fluctuation state)" to the "time saving mode" is performed, and in the case of the ST75 mode. Is the point of shifting to the "time saving mode" via the "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and the "ST middle stage mode (medium speed fluctuation state)", and the point that the jackpot lottery probability is low during the time saving mode (loss). It is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production" during the time saving mode in consideration of the point that it frequently occurs. Therefore, it is preferable that the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in the time reduction mode is "variation state in the time reduction mode <high-speed fluctuation state in the ST mode", and more preferably "variation state in the time reduction mode ≤ ST mode". Medium speed fluctuation state ". As with the ST mode, the time saving mode may be configured so that a plurality of time saving modes can be switched. In this case, a plurality of variation pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. About the production in the time saving mode)
During the time-saving mode, the mode shifts to the "time-saving effect mode" in which the effect related to the "time-saving state" appears. In the time-saving production mode, it becomes an "air battle mode" that expresses the battle between fighters, and is distinguished from each game mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage mode) in the above ST mode. In the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, the time saving mode after the end of ST of the probabilistic jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 is also shifted to the same time saving effect mode. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving jackpot 1 and the time-saving jackpot 2 may be shifted to a time-saving effect mode (for example, a time-saving A effect mode when one time-saving jackpot is won, and a time-saving B effect mode when two time-saving jackpots are won). .. Further, the time saving effect mode at the time of winning the time saving big hit and the time saving effect mode after the end of ST at the time of winning the probability variation big hit (the time saving effect mode related to ST25 and ST75) may be different time saving effect modes.

(7-4. About "ceiling mode": Fig. 7)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 7. In the present embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the case of a large hit. This ceiling function is a function of granting a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) in order to rescue the player when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a big hit. The ceiling privilege is given a profit state that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the hamari relief function. The number of ceiling games of this embodiment is the number of games (number of ceiling games) considering the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of settings 1 to 6, and is the 1000th game of Hamari in the normal mode (three times the number at the low probability). ~ 4 times), the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. The value for setting the number of ceiling games can be set as appropriate. For example, when the jackpot lottery probability in the normal state is a relatively high probability (around 1/100) of the "Amadeji type", the number of ceiling games can be set to about 300 to 500 games. In the present embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different in all or part of each set value. For example, the number of ceiling games may be different for settings 1 to 6 (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ceiling games), or the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) may increase the number of ceiling games to 1000. As a game, the medium / low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) can be set to 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, the setting 6 of the highest setting) can be set to a ceiling game number different from other setting values.

First, the types of ceiling benefits will be explained. The types of ceiling benefits are, for example, "infinite time reduction", "finite time reduction", "infinite probability change", "finite probability change", and "infinite probability change", as shown in the list of "examples of ceiling benefits" in Remark 2 of FIG. There are "infinite latency", "finite latency", "forced hit" and so on. These benefits can be broadly divided into "infinite time reduction" and "finite time reduction" as "ceiling time reduction type", "infinite probability variation" and "finite probability variation" as "ceiling probability variation type", and "infinite latency" and "finite latency". "Probability" is a ceiling privilege that belongs to "Ceiling latent probability type", and "Forced hit" is a ceiling privilege that belongs to "Ceiling hit type". Hereinafter, these ceiling privilege types will be explained one by one.

(Infinite time reduction)
(A) "Infinite time saving" is a privilege to give a time saving state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but it depends on the number of time reductions reaching the next big hit, for example, 10000 times or 65536 times. Even when there is no possibility of ending the time saving state (when it is safe to think that it is 0%) or when the indigestible time saving number is given during the business hours of the pachinko hall (for example, 65536 times). In the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time saving.

(Limited time reduction)
(B) The "finite time reduction" is to give a time reduction state up to a predetermined number of time reductions so that an appropriate jackpot winning rate can be obtained. In this respect, it is different from the above-mentioned infinite time reduction, which has no limit on the number of times. As a typical example, the number of time reductions given is 100 times, which is the same as the time reduction jackpots 1 and 2, or 50 times, but the number of time reductions is not limited to the same as the time reduction jackpot, and different time reductions are given. The number of times (for example, 75 times, 150 times, 200 times, etc.) can be given. It should be noted that even when the number of time reductions that is "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite time reduction" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite time reduction in that the number of times is limited. Then, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time saving.

(Specific example when giving a finite working hours)
Here, when the finite working hours are given, the following giving forms (1) to (4) (finite working hours giving forms 1 to 4) can be used.

(Limited time reduction grant form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to big hits (the number of time reductions given due to the big hit winning (time reduction state)), but the types of time reductions due to ceiling benefits (time reduction state) are more than that. Determined for a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A".

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time reduction A) and 50 times (time reduction B) due to the jackpot. Then, it is configured to give only one type of time reduction number of times 100 times (time reduction A). If the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied, the number of time reductions (for example, 150 times) different from the number of time reductions due to the big hit may be given. In addition, when two or more types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to the ceiling privilege are provided (in the case of "2 ≤ number of types B <number of types A"), one of the time reduction times (time reduction state) is performed by a predetermined lottery. ) Can be decidably configured.

(Limited time reduction grant form 2)
(2) When there are multiple types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to ceiling benefits, one of the time reduction times (time reduction state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery).
For example, it can be determined by lottery from a plurality of time saving times (50 times and 100 times in this embodiment) given due to the big hit winning. In this case, the same number of time reductions as the big hit can be given. Of course, it may be determined by lottery from a plurality of time reduction times (for example, 100 times, 75 times, and 25 times) including a time reduction number different from the time reduction number given due to the big hit winning. In this case, the number of time reductions different from the jackpot may be given. The lottery probabilities (selection rates) of the ceiling privilege types (here, the number of times shortened each time) to be drawn may be the same or substantially the same, or may be all or partly different. In addition, the lottery target may include a "ceiling privilege loss" that does not grant the ceiling privilege. In the case of including the ceiling privilege loss, the ceiling privilege is not always given even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling privilege lottery" will play a role as a hamari relief function.

Further, the lottery probability according to the "set value" may be determined, and the number of time reductions (time reduction state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery according to the set value). For example, as the set value becomes higher, it is configured so that a relatively large number of time reductions (time reduction state) can be easily selected. In other words, the higher the set value, the easier it is to give benefits with a relatively high degree of profit (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Specifically, when "100 times, 75 times, 50 times" is set as the type of time reduction, and "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting" when these lottery probabilities are "setting 1". In the case of "6", it is "45%, 30%, 25%" or the like. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the easier it is to make a big hit, it may be configured so that a relatively large number of time reductions can be easily selected as the set value becomes lower. In other words, as the set value becomes lower, it is easy to give benefits with a relatively high degree of profit (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Further, the configuration may be such that "when a specific ceiling privilege is given, a specific set value is fixed". For example, if 25 times of time reduction is given, "setting 6 is confirmed", and if 75 times is given, "setting 4 or more is confirmed". As described above, the method of determining the ceiling privilege related to the set value can give the player useful information such as the setting guessing element, and is useful for improving the player's motivation to play when he / she encounters the hamari.

(Limited time reduction grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot is N and the average number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 1) to (Equation 3).
(Equation 1) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N <average number of time reductions M". In the case of the present embodiment, the average number of time reductions N due to the big hit is 75 times, so the average number of time reductions M due to the ceiling privilege is set to be a larger number of time reductions. In the case of this example, the ceiling privilege has a relatively higher profit margin than the normal jackpot winning, so it is a nice privilege for the player who has a big hit and the motivation to play is significantly reduced. The average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number. When the average number of working hours M is set to an infinite number of times, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite working hours" is given.
(Equation 2) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N = average number of time reductions M". In this case, the profit degree by the big hit (the number of time reductions) and the profit degree by the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Equation 3) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N> average number of time reductions M". In this case, the profit degree by the big hit is relatively lower than the profit degree by the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to prevent the excessive privilege from being given.

(Limited time reduction grant form 4)
(4) Similar to the above (Equation 3), paying attention to the point that excessive privilege is not given, the number of time reductions that satisfy at least the relationship of "the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege ≤ the maximum number of time reductions due to the big hit" is set. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is less than or equal to the number of time reductions of "time reduction A" due to the time reduction jackpot 1, for example, 100 times or 90 times. Further, paying attention to the minimum number of time reductions due to the big hit, the number of time reductions that satisfies the relationship of "minimum time reduction number due to the big hit ≤ number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege <maximum time reduction number due to the big hit" may be satisfied. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or greater than the number of time reductions B due to the time reduction jackpot 2, and less than the number of time reductions of "time reduction A" due to the time reduction jackpot 1, for example, 50 times or 60 times.

(Infinite probability change)
(C) "Infinite probability change" is a privilege to give a probability change state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite probability change, the number of STs is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but as in the same event as the above "infinite time reduction", the number of STs that will be substantially up to the next big hit (for example, 10,000 times). And 65536 times) may be given.

(Limited probability change)
(D) The "finite probability variation" is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, in which a probability variation state is given up to a predetermined number of STs so as to have an appropriate jackpot winning rate. For example, as in the case of probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7, the number of STs is 100, 75, 25, or the like. Of course, it does not have to be the same number of STs as the probability variation jackpot 1 to 7, and 50 times, 150 times, or the like may be given. It should be noted that even when the number of STs that is "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite probability change" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability change in that there is a limit on the number of times, but it is the same as the above "infinite time reduction". Like an elephant, it may be treated as belonging to infinite probability variation, or may be treated as belonging to finite probability variation (the same applies to infinite latency described later).

(Specific example when giving finite probability variation)
Here, when the finite probability variation is given, the following ceiling privilege granting form (finite probability variation granting form) 1 to the same phenomenon as the content described in the finite time saving granting forms 1 to 4 of the above "finite time saving". It can be 4. In the following finite probability variation grant forms 1 to 4, the "time reduction number" described in the above "finite time reduction grant form 1 to 4" is appropriately read as "ST number", "time reduction state" is replaced with "probability variation state", and the like. Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept), the content will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description for convenience of explanation.

(Limited probability variation grant form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of STs due to big hits (number of STs given due to winning a big hit (probability change state)), but the number of STs due to ceiling benefits (probability change state) is less than that (types). The number of types is B). That is, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A".

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (probability change state) given to the probability change jackpot due to winning is 100 times (probability change A), 75 times (probability change B), and 25 times (probability change C). ), For example, in the ceiling privilege, only one type of ST number of 100 times (probability change A) is given.

(Limited probability variation grant form 2)
(2) When there are multiple types of ST times (probability change state) due to the ceiling privilege, one of the ST times (probability change state) is determined by a predetermined lottery. This point is substantially the same as the content in which the "time reduction number" explained in "(finite time reduction grant form 2)" in the above finite time reduction is appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" is appropriately read as "probability change state". Is.

(Limited probability variation grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs N due to the probability variation jackpot and the average number of STs M due to the ceiling privilege are set, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 4) to (Equation 6). Regarding these (Equation 4) to (Equation 6), the wording and the like of the "time reduction number" of (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) described in "(Limited time reduction grant form 3)" in the above finite time reduction is "ST number of times". It is substantially the same as the content replaced with the wording of ".
(Equation 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N <average number of STs M". The average number of STs M may be an infinite number. When the average number of STs M is an infinite number, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite probability variation" is given.
(Equation 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N = average number of STs M".
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average ST number N> average ST number M".

(Limited probability variation grant form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point that excessive privilege is not given, the number of STs is set to satisfy at least the relationship of "the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege ≤ the maximum number of STs due to the big hit". In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or less than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 1, for example, 100 times, 90 times, and the like. Further, paying attention to the minimum number of STs due to a big hit, the number of STs that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to a big hit ≤ number of STs due to a ceiling privilege <maximum number of STs due to a big hit" may be satisfied. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or greater than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 6, and less than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 1, for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (same ST number as ST75), etc. Is.

(Infinite latency)
(E) "Infinite latency" is a privilege to grant the latency state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite latency, the number of STs is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but as with the above infinite time reduction and infinite probability variation, even if the number of STs that will be the next big hit is given. good.

(Limited latency)
(F) The "finite latent probability" is different from the above-mentioned infinite latent probability, and the latent probability state is given up to a predetermined number of STs so as to have an appropriate winning rate. In the present embodiment, the latent probability jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability state is not provided, but if a part of the probability variation jackpot is a latent probability jackpot, the finite probability variation granting embodiment 1 described in the finite probability variation is provided. It can be configured in the same manner as in ~ 4 (configuration relating to the assignment of the number of STs). This point is substantially the same as the finite probability change (contents in which the wording of "probability change state" is appropriately read as the wording of "latent state"), so detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplicate description. ..

(Forced hit)
(G) “Forced hit” means that a big hit is forcibly awarded regardless of the big hit lottery. "Unrelated to the big hit lottery" means that the big hit lottery itself is not executed, or even if the big hit lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and the big hit lottery is completely irrelevant. Not limited to meaning.

The type of jackpot by forced hit is either probabilistic jackpot (finite probability variable jackpot, infinite probability variable jackpot), time-saving jackpot (finite time-shortening jackpot, infinite time-shortening jackpot), or latent jackpot (finite latent jackpot, infinite latent jackpot). There may be. Further, the maximum number of rounds or the round game mode can be appropriately determined. In addition, the transition destination game state after the forced hit can be appropriately determined. For example, it may be in the same transition destination gaming state (for example, time reduction A, time reduction B, or probability variation (ST) A to C) as in the case where the jackpot shown in FIG. 4 is won, and the finite time reduction described in the above ceiling privilege. It is possible to shift to the same gaming state as the granting forms 1 to 4 and the finite probability variation granting forms 1 to 4.

However, in order not to give excessive benefits, as a compulsory hit, one of the big hits of the big hit lottery target (in the present embodiment, one of the probabilistic big hits 1 to 7 and the time saving big hits 1 to 2). ) Is preferable. More preferably, the profit margin is not higher than the total jackpot. The profit referred to here means "profit from big hit game" or "profit including big hit game and transition destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of "profit by forced hit ≤ profit by probability variable jackpot 4 (the jackpot with the highest degree of profit among all jackpots)".

The ceiling privilege described above is useful as a hamari relief function because it can give a profit equal to or different from the profit degree given by the big hit lottery result.

In addition, although various ceiling benefits have been described above, it is up to you to decide which ceiling benefit to use. In addition, ceiling benefits may include multiple types of benefits with different personalities (for example, finite time reduction and finite probability variation), or benefits with the same personality but different advantages (profit status) (for example, a finite number of time reductions of 100 times). A plurality of types of time saving A and a finite time saving B with 50 times of time saving can be provided. In this case, what kind of multiple types of ceiling benefits (two or more ceiling benefits) can be appropriately determined. For example, a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation can be provided, and which ceiling privilege is to be granted can be determined by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the same lottery probability may be used regardless of the set value, but it is preferable to set the lottery probability according to the set value as in the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, as the set value becomes higher, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, the "finite probability change" side in the case of drawing a finite time reduction and a finite probability change) is likely to be given, or conversely, As the set value becomes higher, a privilege having a relatively low profit margin (for example, the "finite time reduction" side in the case of drawing a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation) can be easily given. In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different personalities" includes, for example, "providing at least two of a short-time jackpot, a probabilistic jackpot, and a latent jackpot", and "having the same personality". However, in the case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different advantages (profit status)", for example, "case of providing multiple jackpots with different time reduction times (time reduction jackpots)" and "multiple jackpots with different ST times (probability variation jackpots)" Or there is a case of "providing a latent jackpot".

Further, after the ceiling privilege is granted, the game state (game mode) related to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is exhausted or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as finite time reduction, finite probability variation, or finite latency, the jackpot is won when the specified number of time reductions or ST times is completed without winning the jackpot. In some cases, the ceiling privilege will not be granted until the mode is changed to the normal mode (normal state) and the ceiling activation trigger (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite latency, the privilege state will be continued until the next big hit, and the privilege state will be terminated by winning the big hit.

If the ceiling privilege is a finite probability change, it is a "finite probability change time reduction type" ceiling privilege that shifts to a time reduction state (finite time reduction or infinite time reduction) when the specified number of STs is completed, as in ST75 mode and ST25 mode. May be. This "finite probability variation time saving type" includes the following types (A) to (Ding).
(A) A "finite probability variation / finite time reduction" type ceiling privilege that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 time reductions) when the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed.
(B) A "finite probability change / infinite time reduction" type ceiling privilege that shifts to infinite time reduction when the specified number of STs is completed.
(丙) When the first specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric support state ends, and the second specified number of STs (for example, 100 times) shifts to a finite probability. "Type ceiling privilege (the first specified ST number and the second specified ST number may be the same number or different times).
(Ding) When the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric support state ends, and the ceiling privilege of the "finite probability change / infinite probability" type that shifts to infinite latency.

Returning to the description of the ceiling mode of FIG. 7. Here, a configuration in which "finite time reduction" (100 times of maximum time reduction by big hit) is adopted as a ceiling privilege will be described as a representative example.

The ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a time saving state or a probable change state according to the ceiling privilege, but here, an example in which "finite working hours" is given is explained, so the ceiling mode is , The game mode is related to the reduced working hours (YJ = 01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "06H" in order to select the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the ceiling. Here, when reaching the ceiling (during the ceiling game), a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (variation pattern for the ceiling) is selected in order to secure the production time width of the "ceiling effect" described later. There is. In the present embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected in all game modes (during total variation pattern selection mode) (see the column of "ceiling variation" in FIG. 26). The fluctuation pattern for the ceiling is not particularly limited as long as the effect time width of the "ceiling effect" can be secured, but a variation pattern having a variation time of at least SP reach or more in the normal mode (at least SP reach without pseudo-ream) is used. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be selected.

Since the big hit lottery is executed as usual in the 1000th game (ceiling game), if the big hit is won in the 1000th game, the big hit game will be started as usual after the 1000th game is completed. Become. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, if the ceiling game is won by chance, the activation of the ceiling function is restricted (prohibited) (see the ceiling activation management process in FIG. 13 described later). ), If the ceiling privilege is given, the 1000th game will be "missing" (if a small hit is provided, it will be a small hit or a loss). This point is not limited to the case where the ceiling privilege is infinite time reduction, and the same applies to the case of infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latency, or finite latency. However, if the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", it is forcibly controlled to the big hit winning state, so the big hit lottery itself of the 1000th game is not executed, or the result is invalid even if the big hit lottery is executed. It should be treated as if the jackpot for the ceiling was won. Therefore, when the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", after the end of the 1000th game, the jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the jackpot for the ceiling is started in the same way as when the normal jackpot is won. Will be. In addition, the hit-and-middle effect during the forced big-hit game may be the same as the normal big-hit (the same as any of the time-saving big-hit 1 and the probabilistic big-hit 1 to 7). You may.

(7-4-1. About the production in the ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, the mode shifts to the "ceiling effect mode" in which an effect (ceiling effect) for notifying the arrival of the ceiling appears. This ceiling effect mode is an effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, it is an effect mode for only one game (one rotation only). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, a decorative pattern in which the decorative pattern on the ceiling (decorative pattern for the ceiling) is different from at least the normal mode (number patterns 1 to 9) appears. The reason for choosing "at least a decorative pattern different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling is reached when a large hamari is encountered in the normal mode, and a decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern that has appeared in the normal mode for a long time is used. This is because it is appropriate to make it appear and notify the arrival of the ceiling.

Specifically, the decorative design for the ceiling is a special design (decorative design for the ceiling) that displays special characters, items, and characters, and the decorative design for the ceiling is a design that has a strong impact in terms of production. Preferably, for example, the decorative symbol 778 (decorative symbol of "heaven", "☆", and "well") shown in Remark 1 of FIG. 7 is used. There are three normal decorative symbol rows, a right symbol, a middle symbol, and a left symbol (see FIG. 5), but the ceiling decorative symbol row does not necessarily have to be the three symbol rows. For example, it can be four symbol sequences of "heaven", "well", "arrival", and "tachi", or two symbol sequences of "heaven" and "well". Further, in order to emphasize that it reaches the ceiling, a huge decorative symbol having a larger display area than a normal decorative symbol or a symbol with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding the decorative symbols related to the ceiling game, normal decorative symbols are used during variable display (all or part of the decorative symbols are the same), and only the decorative symbols that are finally stopped (decorative stop symbols) are used as the decorative symbols for the ceiling. May be good.

In addition, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, the "right-handed instruction image 779 (launch guidance notification effect)" that encourages right-handed hitting has appeared at the start of the symbol variation display game.

The reason why the right-handed instruction image 779 appears is as follows. When a finite time reduction is given as a ceiling privilege (the same applies when an infinite time reduction, a finite probability change, or an infinite probability change is given), the "state with electric support" occurs at the start of the 1000th game. For this reason, it is for the purpose of immediately notifying that the right-handed hit is advantageous and not giving a disadvantage to the player. In the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 779 appears at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in consideration of the fact that the "state with electric support" occurs at the time of the ceiling (1000th game), during the precursor mode or for a part of the period (for example, the game immediately before the ceiling game (the final game of the precursor mode)). It is preferable to bring out an effect (pre-launch guidance notification effect) that informs that the player will be "right-handed" soon.

Further, in the case of "missing" in the symbol variation display game at the time of the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to display a specific advance notice effect. For example, at least one of the high expectation notice effects does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-ream, reach effect, and player participation type effect does not appear. The reason is that there is no need for a voluminous advance notice that will fuel the expectation of winning a big hit at the ceiling. However, this does not apply when a pseudo-ream, reach effect, player participation type effect, or the like is provided as a notice effect exclusively for the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to show the notice effect that arouses the expectation of winning, so if you want to show the notice effect such as pseudo-ream, reach effect, or player participation type effect, other effect. It is preferable to use a ceiling-only production mode that is different from the production mode that appears in the mode. In addition, as a privilege of reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may appear. This is because giving the player useful information such as a setting guessing factor is useful for improving the player's motivation to play when he / she encounters Hamari. When the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100%, or the setting suggestion effect may be displayed by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, in the ceiling game (1000th game), if a big hit is won by chance, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but in the normal effect mode (for example, in the general mode or the precursor mode). The notice effect that can appear at the time of winning the big hit related to the above is to appear (see the column of "ceiling" in FIG. 24). This is because even if a big hit is made in the ceiling game, if the effect for the ceiling is made to appear, it becomes unclear whether the big hit or the ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(7-5. Heaven mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode that shifts to the next game (1001st game) of the ceiling game, and the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time saving state or a probable change state according to the ceiling privilege, but here. Since an example in which "finite time reduction (number of time reductions 100 times)" is given is described, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time reduction state (YJ = 01H). Further, during the heaven mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "07H" in order to select the variation pattern dedicated to heaven. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is the case of ceiling benefits other than "forced hit" (finite time reduction, infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latency, or finite latency, etc.).

The heaven mode is terminated when the jackpot is won, or when the specified number of time reductions or STs is completed without winning the jackpot if it is the above-mentioned limited ceiling privilege. Here, since the ceiling privilege is explained as "finite time reduction (time reduction 100 times)", the heaven mode is when the time reduction 100 times is completed or when the big hit is won during the time reduction digestion. It will be terminated. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode. If the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation or finite latency, it will be terminated when the number of STs is completed or if the jackpot is won within the number of STs, and infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation and infinite latency. In that case, it will be terminated when the big hit is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation states, medium-speed fluctuation states, low-speed fluctuation states, and the like can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state during the heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production" as in the time reduction mode. That is, the fluctuation state in the heaven mode when the finite time reduction or the infinite time reduction is given is "the fluctuation state in the heaven mode <high-speed fluctuation state in the ST mode" or "the fluctuation state in the heaven mode ≤ the medium speed fluctuation state in the ST mode". It is preferable to say. However, in the case of infinite time reduction, a high-speed fluctuation state may be used in consideration of the fact that there is no limit to the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, the probability of big hit lottery is high in addition to the state with electric support, so it is possible to make the fluctuation state the same as or substantially the same as the high speed fluctuation state in ST mode. preferable. On the other hand, in the case of infinite latency or finite latency grant, the jackpot lottery probability is high, but it is controlled under the state without electric support, so it is difficult for the operation hold ball to occur as in the normal state. .. In consideration of this point, in the case of infinite latency or finite latency grant, the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state slower than the time saving mode (the fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long). ) Is preferable. That is, the relationship satisfies "variable state in normal mode ≤ infinite latent probability or variable state in finite latent probability <variable state in time saving mode".

(7-5-2. About the production in heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, the mode is changed to the "heaven production mode", which is a production related to the heaven mode (a production for heaven). This heaven effect mode is an effect mode dedicated to the next game on the ceiling (after the 1001 game), and ends when the heaven mode ends. During this heaven effect mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing space), and the heaven mode is notified.

When a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction is given as a ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "time reduction effect mode (air battle mode)" related to the time reduction state may be adopted as the heaven effect mode.

Further, when finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite latency, or infinite latency is given as the ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST effect mode" related to the probability variation state may be adopted as the heaven effect mode. In this case, as in the ST effect mode, the mode may be changed to a different ST effect mode according to the number of ST digestions. Specifically, depending on the number of ST productions, the production modes are sequentially selected, such as "ST production early stage mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) ⇒ ST production middle stage mode (water battle mode) ⇒ ST production final stage mode (land battle mode)". Can be migrated. In the case of infinite probability change or infinite latency, there is no limit on the number of STs, so after the 101st ST, the ST final stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a new ST production mode (ST continuation production mode) may be continued. May be migrated to. Further, the ST 101th stage may be returned to the ST effect early stage mode, and the transition of "ST effect early stage mode ⇒ ST effect middle stage mode ⇒ ST effect final stage mode" may be looped again.

Further, during the heaven effect mode, it may be configured to be switchable to either normal / simple / premium mode as in the same event as the contents of the "precursor effect mode" and "ST effect mode" already explained. , It may be configured so that switching between normal / simple / premium mode is impossible (controlled under the non-switchable state).

In addition, as part of the relief measures for the player who has made a big hit, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher in the heaven mode than in the other game modes. For example, the heaven mode should be configured so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect that can appear in the symbol variation display game) is at least higher than that of the normal mode (general mode and / or precursor mode). Can be done. In particular, if the ceiling privilege is a privilege with electric support (ceiling privilege other than infinite latency and finite latency), the player is placed under a high base state during heaven mode, so the player has his own ball (game). It is possible to proceed with the game without significantly reducing the game medium owned by the person or the game value equivalent thereto, or while maintaining the current state. Therefore, some players can get advantageous information by eating the hamari, contrary to the normal mode, such as "You may eat a little hamari until you see the setting suggestion effect". It is thought that there are many players who want to do it. In consideration of such a point, it is preferable to change the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect with a high probability during the heaven mode to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone". As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play after the hamari.

<8. About the game progress form: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a specific game progress mode according to the game machine 1 will be described while paying attention to the game mode transition control and the effect aspect.

It should be noted that what kind of striking method the player should take to obtain an advantageous situation basically changes according to the internal gaming state (when focusing on the gaming mode, it is related to the internal gaming state). It changes according to the game mode to be played). As already explained, in the normal state (normal mode), the "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass the left flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous, and the probabilistic state (ST mode) or the time saving state (ST mode) or the time saving state ( In the case of the time saving mode, the ceiling mode, and the heaven mode), it is advantageous to hit the right side so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous striking method according to the gaming state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of a left striking advantage (normal state), "design variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side". Is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability change state, time saving state), it is assumed that the "design variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side" is executed. Further, the game mode will be described as starting from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

If a big hit is won during the normal mode, it becomes a so-called "first hit", and the big hit game according to the winning big hit is started (see the block frame of "first hit" in FIG. 6). The method of hitting during the big hit is "right-handed" aiming at the big winning opening 50 side.

To explain by focusing on the production side, if the probability variation jackpot 1 (5R probability variation ST100: special figure 1 side highest profit jackpot) is won during the normal mode, the decorative symbols will stop at "7 symbol alignment (777)". You will be informed that you have won the jackpot that will bring you the highest profit. As for the winning effect at the time of winning the probability change big hit 1, the "ST rush confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies the ST mode entry is displayed, and the transition confirmation to the ST100 mode is notified. Then, after the big hit game, the mode is changed to ST100 mode.

On the other hand, if the probability variation jackpot 2, 3 and the time saving jackpot 1 or 2 are won in the normal mode, the decorative symbols stop except for "7 symbol alignment", which is the probability variation jackpot in this symbol variation display game. It is not notified whether it is a short-time jackpot or not. If the game is stopped except for "7 symbols", the "ST rush challenge effect" of the player participation type effect will be developed in the hit effect during the subsequent big hit game, and the big hit type will be notified by this effect result. .. In this ST rush challenge production, if a success production appears, it is definitely notified that it is a probabilistic jackpot, and if a failure production appears, it is a time-saving jackpot. In addition, there are two types of success effects, "great success effect" and "normal success effect", and when "great success effect" appears, it means that you have won the probable change jackpot 2 (ST75 mode). However, when the "normal success effect" appears, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot 3 (ST25 mode) has been won. On the other hand, there are two types of failure effects, "great failure effect" and "normal failure effect". When "great failure effect" appears, the time reduction jackpot 2 (time reduction B: time reduction 50 times) If the "normal failure effect" appears, you will be notified that you have won 1 time reduction jackpot (time reduction A: time reduction 100 times).

If the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 2 are won, the game shifts to the corresponding ST mode after the jackpot game (see the block frame of the ST mode in FIG. 6). , Shift to the time saving mode (see the block frame of the time saving mode in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and the time saving mode, as described above, the “right-handed advantage” is obtained, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side is executed. If the big hit is won on the special figure 2 side, as shown in FIG. 4, all are probable variable big hits, so as long as the big hit continues to be won during the ST mode or the time saving mode, the ST mode loops, which is a great profit for the player. Is supposed to bring.

If any of the probabilistic jackpots 4 to 7 is won during the ST mode, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed. For example, if you win the "Probability Change Jackpot 4 (10R Probability Change ST100)" of the highest profit jackpot on the special figure 2 side (the jackpot of the highest profit among all jackpots), a special decorative pattern (for example, a number) that is not displayed in the normal mode The symbol that displays the character, not the symbol, etc.) will stop, and the jackpot winning will be congratulated. In addition, if the profit margin is lower than the probability variation jackpot 4 (10R probability variation ST100) but the profit margin is higher than the probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST25), the "odd number" is won. When "matching symbols" is stopped and "probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST25)" with the lowest profitability is won, "even-numbered symbol alignment" is stopped. In addition, during the big hit game, the hitting effect according to the big hit type appears.

(When you win the "Probability Change Big Hit 7 (Special 7R Probability Change)")
However, when the "probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation)" is won, "odd symbol alignment" or "even symbol alignment" is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability. If it is won that the even-numbered symbol alignment is stopped, a hitting effect that is at least partly common to the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and / or probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST75) during the subsequent jackpot game is performed. Information about 7 winning probable big hits (for example, confirmation of entry into ST mode (ST100 mode)) is notified (promoted) at a predetermined timing of the hitting effect, for example, during a specific round effect or ending effect. Be notified). As a result, even if the "even number of symbols" is stopped, the possibility of entering the ST100 mode where high profits can be expected remains, and the expectation of entering the ST mode can be fueled by the hit-and-miss production. It has become.

However, in the hitting effect, the same (same) hitting effect as the probability variation jackpot 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and / or the probability variation jackpot 7 (7R probability variation ST75) appears in the production without performing the above promotion notification. You may conceal the winning of the probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) and notify the winning of the probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) in the ST mode after the jackpot game.

When the above promotion notification is performed during the ST mode (ST effect mode), it may be during the period until the ST early mode ends (until the number of STs 25 times ends), but the ST early mode end game (ST). It is preferable to notify during the 25th rotation). Specifically, until the number of the first ST (for example, 25 STs by winning 5 probabilistic jackpots) or the number of second STs (for example, 100 STs by 7 probabilistic jackpots), whichever is smaller, is reached (for example, the number of games during ST). The display can be controlled so as not to directly indicate whether it is the first hit (for example, the probability variation jackpot 5) or the second hit (for example, the probability variation jackpot 7) until the number reaches 25 times. Is. However, the timing is not limited to such notification timing, and for example, the timing of the promotion notification may be a predetermined timing at the start of the next game after the ST early stage effect mode ends or during the ST middle stage mode. Further, a "step-up" promotion notification may be performed in which the first promotion notification is performed in the ST early stage effect mode and the second promotion notification is performed in the ST middle stage effect mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification that notifies that the ST75 mode entry or higher is definite, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification that deterministically notifies the ST100 mode entry. By doing so, it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension as to whether the winning jackpot type is any of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 7 for a long period of time during the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, the expectation of transition to the ST100 mode can be maintained. It should be noted that whether to notify the promotion during the hitting effect or to notify the promotion during the ST mode can be determined by a scenario lottery when determining the winning effect scenario at the start of the big hit game.

(Transition to ceiling mode)
Further, in the normal mode, if the big hit is not won until the 989th game, the game shifts to the "precursor mode" from the 990th game (see the block frame of the precursor mode in FIG. 7). Then, if the player cannot win the big hit even in the precursor mode and reaches the 1000th game (ceiling to the ceiling), the game shifts to the "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In the present embodiment, in the case of loss, the ceiling privilege "finite time reduction" is given, and after the 1001st game, the mode is shifted to the heaven mode.

<9. About the specific notice effect prohibition function in the precursor mode: Fig. 32>
Here, in the present embodiment, the specific notice effect prohibition function (specific notice effect prohibition means) operates during the precursor mode. Specifically, paying attention to the fact that the precursor mode is a game mode related to notification of the proximity of the ceiling and the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of ceiling benefits, the precursor mode (precursor effect mode) and the ceiling mode (ceiling effect) Mode) prohibits the appearance of specific notice effects. In the case of the present embodiment, as the prohibition function, "means for prohibiting pre-reading notice (specific pre-reading notice prohibiting means)" for prohibiting the execution of pre-reading notice are provided. Hereinafter, “means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during precursors” will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the look-ahead notice is prohibited by the means for prohibiting the look-ahead notice during the precursory sign. FIG. 32 describes a mode in which the “holding change notice” is treated as a prohibited object by the precursory pre-reading notice prohibiting means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “holding change notice” and / or “variation” is described as the prohibited object. It can be a "middle look-ahead notice".

(A. Configuration without pre-reading notice prohibition means (normal case): Fig. 32 (a))
A “normal case” will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). This "normal case" indicates a configuration in which the precursory pre-reading notice prohibition means is not provided, and a configuration in which the precursory pre-reading notice prohibition means described later is provided (Fig. (C-1) (c-2)). ) Is shown as a comparative example. The illustrated hold icon 770 is a "normal hold display (white hold)", and the hold icon 771 is a "high expectation hold display" of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772. Indicates "Ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". Further, the hold icon 771 here indicates, among the special hold displays, the "rainbow-colored hold (this secured hold display)" that can appear at the time of winning the big hit.

Further, in FIG. 3A, for convenience of explanation, when the three operation holding balls of the 997th to 999th games exist, the operation holding ball relating to the 1000th game (ceiling game) is shown as the fourth operation holding ball. This is a typical example of a case in which (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game hold ball") has occurred.

In the case of the comparative example shown in FIG. Regardless of this, the 1000th game hold display is allowed to execute the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice). Here, "allowing" the ceiling hold display means that it may appear either when it always appears or when it appears when a predetermined lottery is won ((b) described later). ) (C) (C) (C). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of change in the hold of the third rainbow-colored hold (this secured stay), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is Fujimaru-kun's hold icon 772 (for ceiling). Can be changed to hold display).

However, if the jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function will not be activated (the number of ceiling games will be reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling hold display. In addition, if the hold change notice (special hold display) that announces the winning expectation and the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) that announces that the game is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, the notices with different personalities are displayed. The display will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, these problems are solved by providing a means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during the precursory sign.

(B. Configuration example provided with the pre-reading notice prohibiting means in the precursor: FIG. 32 (b), (c-1), (c-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned "means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during precursors" is provided will be described. This includes the "case of preferentially executing the normal look-ahead notice" shown in Fig. (B) and the "case of preferentially executing the ceiling look-ahead notice" shown in Figures (c-1) and (c-2). be.

(Case of preferentially executing normal look-ahead notice: Fig. 32 (b))
FIG. 32 (b) shows a "case in which the normal look-ahead notice is prioritized", specifically, "a case in which the ceiling look-ahead notice is prohibited when the reserved residence exists before the arrival of the ceiling game (ceiling game hold ball). (Case where pre-reading notice is prohibited) ”is shown. Here, as in the case of the above figure (a), the case where the third operation holding ball is the “reserved holding” is shown.

In the case of this example, if the reserved reservation exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, the hold display of the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice) and is "normal hold display". Appears. In other words, the "ceiling game hold ball" is configured as the "pre-reading prohibition target hold" by the pre-reading notice prohibition means during the omen.

The reason why the pre-reading prohibited target hold is set to "ceiling game hold ball" is as follows. If there is a reserved stay before the ceiling game, the jackpot will be won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is granted), so there is little need to display the ceiling hold display. In addition, if the ceiling reservation display is prohibited when the reservation is present, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, it is a speculation element that "there is a reservation before the ceiling game is reached". There is also a dramatic merit that the player who knows this can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling is reached. However, instead of prohibiting the ceiling hold display at all when the secured stay exists, if the hold change notice (rainbow-colored hold) related to the secured stay has not appeared, that is, look-ahead for the secured stay. If the notice lottery is "missing", the ceiling hold display may appear (allow). If the notice of change of hold related to the reserved stay has not appeared, the player cannot know that the reserved stay exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for the ceiling has appeared. Even so, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the ceiling hold display when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this secured stay has appeared, it is higher than the high expectation hold change notice (for example, green hold or more). It may be configured to prohibit the appearance of the hold display for the ceiling when the notice of change of hold has appeared.

(Case of prioritizing execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling: Fig. 32 (c-1) (c-2))
Next, the "case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling" will be described.

FIG. 32 (c-1) is an example of "a case where the pre-reading notice for the ceiling is preferentially executed".
(Α) A configuration example of "in the precursor mode, a part of the normal look-ahead notice is prohibited, while the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed".
(Β) It shows a configuration example that "in the precursor mode, the normal look-ahead notice is totally prohibited, while the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed".
In the configuration example shown in this figure (c-1), the look-ahead prohibited target hold is not set as the “ceiling game hold ball” as in the above figure (b), but the look-ahead prohibited target hold is “digested during the precursory game”. This is a configuration example in which only the operation holding ball to be performed is used and the ceiling game holding ball is excluded from the prohibited target.

In the above (α), "prohibiting a part of the normal look-ahead notice" means, for example, that among the normal hold change notices (special hold display), the appearance of the low expectation hold change notice is allowed, but it is high. Expectation hold The appearance of change notice is prohibited. Specifically, it has the following configurations 1, 2 and the like.
(Structure 1) Hold change notice (blue hold and yellow hold) below yellow hold is allowed, and hold change notice (green hold, red hold and rainbow color) above green, which has a higher expectation of winning than the yellow hold. Appearance of (pending) is prohibited.
(Structure 2) The appearance of the hold change notice (hold display other than the rainbow-colored hold) indicating other than the correctness is permitted, and the appearance of the hold change notice hold indicating the correctness is prohibited.

The above-mentioned "Structure 1" is intended to prohibit only high-expectation pending change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of the reserved stay. On the other hand, the above-mentioned "Structure 2" prohibits only the "rainbow-colored hold" of the reserved retention display among the high-expectation hold change notices. Therefore, in the case of the configuration 2, the occurrence of a hold change notice other than the “rainbow color hold” indicating the correctness is allowed.

In the above (β), "totally prohibiting pre-reading notice" means that normal pre-reading notice (here, hold change notice) is prohibited at all, and the appearance of the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is displayed. It is a configuration that allows. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), the normal look-ahead notice does not appear at all in the precursor mode, and only the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed to appear.

The reason for making the figure (c-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is allowed to appear indiscriminately, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time, and the player (especially, the hold display) will be displayed. It causes confusion for game beginners). In particular, if the high-expectation hold change notice and the ceiling hold change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead notice itself, or at least prohibit the high-expectation hold change notice. Also, if part or all of the look-ahead notice is prohibited during the precursory mode, the player does not know that the reserved retainer exists or is likely to exist before the ceiling game is reached, but even so. This is because even if the high-expectation hold change notice indicating that is not shown, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself in the precursor mode is completely prohibited, the burden of directing control can be reduced.

FIG. (C-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike the above figure (C-1), the ceiling hold change notice is preferentially executed by defining a part of the period in the precursor mode as the look-ahead prohibited section. FIG. (C-2) shows, as a representative example, an example in which the maximum number of reserved balls before the ceiling game (the section from the 996th to the 999th game) is set as the look-ahead prohibited section. In the case of this example, the look-ahead notice is completely prohibited in the sections of the 996th to 999th games. However, instead of prohibiting the look-ahead notice at all in the section, the configuration may be such that "a part of the look-ahead notice is prohibited" as shown in (α) of the above figure (c-1).

In addition, all of (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2) of FIG. 32 are the number of ceiling games by the specific notification effect such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (residual ceiling number display effect)". It can be configured so that the number of remaining games up to can be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not foretell the winning expectation, but merely informs the remaining ceiling game, and does not fulfill the advancement function such as the look-ahead advancement. However, the winning expectation may be announced by using the effect mode of the countdown display, that is, the possibility of the existence of the secured stay may be notified. For example, in the case where the pre-reading notice for the ceiling shown in Fig. Each time the item) is digested, a special countdown display (for example, the difference in display color and the difference in display size) is performed, which is different from the normal countdown display (display mode when the secured ceiling does not exist). It may suggest the existence of a hold. For example, if the normal countdown display uses a white number image, the special countdown display changes the number image to a color other than white (red), or the number image becomes huge. be.

The present embodiment may include, for example, the following configuration regarding the look-ahead notice.
Based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (when the starting means detects the game ball), the acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information, and
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding winning based on the game information acquired by the above acquisition means, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol variation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the symbol stop display mode.
The hold storage means (hold storage area of RAM 203) that holds and stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum number of hold storages until the game symbol is subjected to the variable display operation of the game symbol in the symbol display means. , S311 to S314) in FIG.
Before the variable display operation of the game symbol based on the reserved memory is executed, at least the pre-reading determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) for pre-reading the lottery result by the lottery means.
A look-ahead notice effect control means (effect control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be able to execute and control a look-ahead notice for notifying information related to the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means.
A look-ahead notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) that prohibits execution (display) of the look-ahead notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition, and
Ceiling privilege control means (FIG. 7, FIG. 12, S420, S421, S412, FIGS. 13 to 15, etc.) that grants a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous than the normal state (execution control of the ceiling privilege) based on a predetermined grant condition. When,
The above ceiling privilege is granted (for example, the ceiling game is imminent, the ceiling privilege is granted within the number of existing operation hold balls, or the symbol variation display game related to the target operation hold ball is given. With the ceiling privilege advance notification control means for executing and controlling the ceiling front notification effect (for example, the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) in FIG. 32) for in advance notifying that the ceiling privilege will be given when the ceiling privilege is executed. , And can be configured to control multiple types of gaming states (gaming modes). The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits execution of the pre-reading notice during all or a part of the specific game mode (FIG. 32 (b) (c-1) (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before the arrival of the ceiling game (before the transition to the ceiling mode), and specifically, a precursor mode immediately before the arrival of the ceiling game (the game mode immediately before the transition to the ceiling mode). In addition, the ceiling privilege control means specifically, after the predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of the electric support or after the big hit game, or after shifting to the game state with a low probability state, etc.), the hit game. Is not generated (or without winning a big hit), and when the number of fluctuations (number of games) of the symbol executed in the game state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (number of ceiling games), it is normal. It works as a functional unit that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to latent state)
In addition, when providing the latent probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, it suffices to set different data values from the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to other gaming states and the gaming state determination number YJ. A "latent mode" may be provided as a game mode corresponding to the latent state, and a "latent effect mode" may be provided as an effect mode related to the latent mode. Further, although all the ST modes according to the present embodiment have been described as being game modes corresponding to the "probability change state", all or part of the ST mode can be treated as the game mode corresponding to the "latent state". The fluctuation state under the latent probability mode (latent probability state) is explained in the above-mentioned "(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to the heaven mode)" In the case of infinite latent probability or finite latent probability grant "". It is preferable to set the fluctuation state to be the same as or substantially the same as that of the normal mode, or at least a fluctuation state slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long).

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 18, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. It is mainly composed of 9) and.

<12. Main control side Main processing: Fig. 8>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is demonstrated and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program goes out of control. May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is nextly determined whether or not the setting value can be changed in the setting change mode transition state (step S014). In the case of the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are operated in the state where the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (door open sensor 61 is ON (opening detection)). If the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the ON operation is performed (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97, and it is assumed that the setting change operation is in progress. , It is controlled to the setting change allowable state (setting change mode transition state) in which the setting value can be changed.

When the setting change mode is in the transition state (step S014: YES), the setting change process for managing the change operation of the set value (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In the setting change process, first, the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is cleared, and the ON / OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 related to the setting change operation is monitored. The setting value can be changed to any of the setting values 1 to 6 by operating the setting change switch 95 by a person related to the hall, and the setting change completion switch 96 is turned off. Determines the set value. When the CPU 201 confirms that the set value has been confirmed, the CPU 201 stores the set value data in the set value storage area of the RAM 203, and exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-region RAM clear processing (step S031) described later. The RAM clear switch 98 can be made to function as a setting change switch without providing the setting change switch 95 (the RAM clear switch 98 also has the function of the setting change switch 95). Further, the setting key switch 94 can be made to function as the setting change completion switch without providing the setting change completion switch 96 (the setting key switch 94 also has the function of the setting change completion switch 96). In this case, the setting change operation can be terminated by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (step S015). Here, whether or not the setting value stored in the above setting value storage area is a normal value (whether or not a value indicating any of settings 1 to 6 is stored), and the checksum value at the time of backup are set. Check if it is a normal value. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), the power re-on wait process (step S020) described later related to the RAM error is executed.

When there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). For this backup flag BF, "5AH (normal value)" is the BF flag storage area of the RAM in the area when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9) described later. Is set to. Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠ 5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, when the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the power re-on wait process is executed (step S020).

In this power re-on wait process, a control process for forcibly stopping the progress of the game process is executed as a process when a RAM error occurs. This power-on waiting process is a process that is executed even when the RAM in step S015 is abnormal (step S15: YES). When this power re-turning wait process is executed, unless the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on again, the setting change transition mode state is set at the time of turning the power on again, and the above setting change process (step S023) is executed. The RAM error state cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, the setting change process (step S023) and the in-region RAM clear process (step S031) described later are executed to execute the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (out-of-area RAM). Area) is cleared) and the RAM error is resolved.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear mode transition state is in effect (step S025). In this RAM clear mode transition state, when the RAM clear operation is performed, specifically, in the state where the power to the gaming machine 1 is off, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (not operated to the setting change mode side). The transition is made when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on (setting key switch signal OFF, RAM clear signal ON).

When the RAM clear mode transition state is set (step S025: YES), the in-region RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In the in-area RAM clearing process, at least the storage area other than the RAM area related to the performance display and the set value storage area is cleared from the storage area of the RAM 203. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set when the power is cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Further, here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the initialization notification effect for notifying the RAM clear is executed, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" as the effect mode in the initial state. Specifically, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the effect mode is also set to the normal effect mode corresponding to the normal mode (one of the normal A to C effect modes (for example, the normal mode)). ..

After finishing the RAM clearing process in the area of step S031, the initial setting process at the time of RAM clearing (initial data setting process at power-on) is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process at power-on, for example, 30000 ms is set in the timer for transmitting the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special diagram 1 stop symbol, Special figure 2 Stop symbol) Loss symbol data is set as data. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026). In this setting confirmation mode transition state, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, specifically, in the state where the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off. (Setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF), and the transition is made when the power is turned ON. The above-mentioned "setting confirmation operation" is an operation performed when, for example, a person involved in the hall confirms the current setting value.

When the setting confirmation mode is in the transition state (step S026: YES), the setting confirmation process (step S027) for controlling the current setting value to the confirmable setting confirmation state is executed, and when the setting confirmation process is completed, the process continues. Then, the backup return process (step S028) for returning the game process from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure is executed. In the setting confirmation process, a display process for displaying the current setting value (setting confirmation display) on the setting display 97 is performed. The display of this set value is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

When it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, when the power is simply turned on to the gaming machine 1, the backup restoration processing (step S028) is performed, and the gaming processing at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. Restore.

After executing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup recovery processing (step S028), the CTC setting is performed. The process is executed (step S036). Here, the CTC setting process for generating a timer interrupt periodically is executed every 4 ms. As a result, after that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state), and the game is played. The start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the launching motion of the game ball from the launching device 32 is allowed. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory.

When the series of power-on processing is completed, the infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a random number for special symbol determination used for a symbol lottery, a random number for an auxiliary hit lottery (a random number for an auxiliary hit determination used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol determination used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the program outside the region is subsequently executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregation division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor aggregation division process in step S043 is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and then the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed (main loop process). .. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 9>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes a power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power supply level supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF ← 5AH) and the checksum value. Checksum calculation (here, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the RAM in the area), backup processing including storage of the calculation result, etc. are performed. The power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, winning counters for winning ball counts provided for each winning opening) are updated based on the detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1. Further, here, the input data is created based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error process is performed in the error management process (step S089) described later.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting error check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an error has occurred in the set value data and a setting error occurs. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, the setting value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the setting abnormality check process. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute the setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when this setting error check process is executed again, the process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random numbers related to each variable display game are updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and the random number counter goes around. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In that case, an error command capable of specifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. When the error is cleared, an error clearing command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to execute the error clearing process.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included therein, and causes the payout operation of the designated prize ball number to be executed.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processing is executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for auxiliary hit determination, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. It is acquired (Random number acquisition process for Fuzu), and the game information is stored as hold data (Holding ball for operation of Fuzu) up to the maximum number of hold storages (4 in this case) (Hold storage process for Fuzu). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop). Design) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the Fuden open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a hit, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, and the excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c. Thereby, the opening / closing operation pattern of the opening / closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processing related to the special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process (big hit determination means), a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the special symbol (look-ahead variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) and Decide on a special stop symbol. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, it is necessary for the hit game, such as the execution control of the hit game according to the winning win and the setting process of the transition destination game state after the big hit game, mainly based on the big hit lottery result. Perform various processing. The special electric accessory management process works as a special game control means for executing and controlling a winning game according to the winning type. The details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (during a hit game, during a state with electric support (time saving state or probable change state)). LED data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) is executed for various LED display devices such as a normal symbol display device 39a, a special symbol display device 38a, 38b, and a right-handed display device 39b. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output by this LED management process. Will be done.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as a hall computer HC.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094), the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c are used. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the lower starting port 35 and the large winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

Next, all the registers are saved (step S101), the performance display monitoring process belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all the registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing related to calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control is executed.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processing of steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special symbol management process: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then performs the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later in FIG.

When the start port check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit middle flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit medium flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress. Although the small hit is not provided in this embodiment, it will be described below assuming that the hit type includes "small hit".

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress. If the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and the flag is in effect. When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

During the small hit game (step S303: = 5AH) or during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), step S309 is performed as it is without performing the processing related to the variation display operation of the special symbol of steps S306 to S308. Proceed to the special symbol display data update process of. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is held as being fixedly displayed as the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol.

On the other hand, in step S304, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: ≠ 5AH, and step S304: ≠ 5AH), processing is performed according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. Then, any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)", it is special. When the symbol changing process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a waiting state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is being stopped (confirmed) and displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). Through these processes, a variable display operation of a special symbol (a display operation that sets a variable start and a variable stop) is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B, respectively.

After completing any of the processes of steps S306 to S308, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ), And if the special symbol is not changing, the data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data update process is completed, the special symbol management process is exited and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Special figure 1 Starting port check process: Fig. 11>
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is mainly a process related to hold storage when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start port 34. And, it is mainly composed of processing related to look-ahead judgment. It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 start port check process will be mainly described here.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (starting port on the special drawing 1 side) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating an over-winning (in the case of special figure 1). B006H, B106H in the case of special drawing 2) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (step S313), and step S314. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the big hit determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random numbers as hold data are special symbols. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved storage area (first reserved storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1) and a special symbol. A special figure 2 hold storage area (second hold storage area) corresponding to 2 is provided, and hold data corresponding to the maximum number of operation hold balls can be stored in each.

Next, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting the look-ahead determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the above-mentioned "hold addition command" (step S315). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the "look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "look-ahead prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting pre-reading determination (prohibiting pre-reading notice) for the special figure 1 operation holding ball side when the special figure 1 start opening check process is in progress (special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition). ), And when the special figure 2 start port check process is in progress (not shown), the condition for prohibiting the look-ahead judgment for the special figure 2 operation holding ball side (prohibiting the look-ahead notice) (special figure 2 look-ahead prohibition condition) ). In the present embodiment, if the special figure 2 operation hold ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation hold ball in the "gaming state with electric support state (time saving state or probability change state)", the special figure 1 "Pre-reading is prohibited", and conversely, if the special figure 1 operation hold ball is more likely to occur than the special figure 2 operation hold ball, "a game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state)". For example, "Special figure 2 look-ahead is prohibited". Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the reduced working hours state or the probable change state, it is assumed that the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is being satisfied, and the determination result is ‘YES’. Further, as a pre-reading prohibition condition, it is also possible to prohibit pre-reading in the case of a specific game mode (for example, in the precursor mode).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the current game mode can be specified by the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) type (see the column of Tcode in FIG. 28), when the game mode is determined, the variable pattern selection mode (see the column of Tcode in FIG. 28). The value of the Tcode) may be determined, but an identifier (for example, the game mode determination number YM) that can identify each game mode itself is provided separately from the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), whereby the current game mode is determined. The game mode may be determined. For example, when "general mode A" and "general mode B" are provided as game modes belonging to the general mode, these have the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), but as different game modes as the game mode. This is the case you want to manage. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current gaming state (internal gaming state or gaming mode) (when performing game processing that requires information on the gaming state), the current internal gaming state, the current fluctuation pattern. The game operation is performed by appropriately using one or more identifiers of the selection mode or the identifier that can identify the current game mode (game state determination number YJ, variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, the above-mentioned game mode determination number YM, etc.). The configuration may be processable. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball of this special figure 1 is not executed, and the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice of the current operation hold ball is controlled to the prohibited state (the look-ahead notice for the current action hold ball is not executed).

Special Figure 1 When the read-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and in step S322 described later. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball this time is not executed, the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data that specifies that the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S321) has not been executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the random number determination process is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later)" is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation. In step S410) of FIG. 12, a'look-ahead winning / failing determination'is performed in advance.

In the above random number determination process, first, a "hit random number determination table (not shown)" is acquired, and a random number value for big hit determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (look-ahead winning determination) for the operation pending ball this time is executed, and the lottery result (look-ahead winning result) is acquired.

In the above-mentioned hit random number determination table, the hit random number determination table (special figure 1) corresponding to each of the special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation hold ball (special symbol change display game 2) is included. A hit random number determination table and a special figure 2 hit random number determination table) are provided. The "random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and the "random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, a judgment area (judgment value) for determining a winning type (whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) is provided for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability and low probability). It is determined in association with the random number value for big hit judgment (size of random number for big hit judgment: 65536). Specifically, the winning type depends on which judgment value the random number value for big hit judgment belongs to. It is supposed to be decided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the lottery probability of a big hit is different depending on the settings 1 to 6). Has been done. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/189, high probability 1/63", setting 5 "low probability 1/198, high probability 1/66", ..., Setting 2 "low probability 1 /". With 231 "high probability 1/77" and setting 1 "low probability 1/240, high probability 1/80", the jackpot is won. The probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A'look-ahead symbol determination'is performed to determine in advance the lottery (step S411 in FIG. 12, which will be described later).

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, the "design table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ) ”Is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. The symbol determination) is executed, and the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result) is acquired.

The above "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "missing symbol table" for determining a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided according to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later.

In the symbol table, the determination area (judgment value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and the random value for special symbol determination (for example, the size of the random value for special symbol determination: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. In addition, special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number are acquired as data indicating the lottery result. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, one of the big hits is determined according to the symbol lottery rate of FIG. Although not shown, the loss types on the special figure 1 side are provided with loss A and loss B, and the symbol lottery rate is 95% for loss A and 5% for loss B. .. When the loss B is selected, a reach other than the N reach (for example, a reach of SP reach or higher) is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 26). Further, the loss type on the special figure 2 side is one type of loss A. The type of loss is not particularly limited, and one or more may be provided.

The "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), and specifically, the hit type shown in FIG. 4 and the loss type (not shown). It is data for identifying which of (1 or a plurality of types) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 12, a process related to a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, and a process related to execution control of a jackpot game). It is data used in (special electric accessory management process of FIG. 17), and the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. , It is used when the main control unit 20 side specifies the stop symbol type of the special symbol. The normal symbol is also provided with the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number in the same manner as the special symbol.

A common symbol table may be defined for all settings, but a symbol table may be defined according to the settings. For example, it can be configured as follows (A) and (B).
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or a plurality of winning types is different in a part or all of each set value. For example, the symbol lottery rate of the probability variation jackpot 1 can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (at least the total symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (probability variation jackpot and / or latent probability jackpot)) is different in all or part of each set value. For example, the probability variation inrush rate on the special figure 1 side is 50% (see the symbol lottery probability of the probability variation jackpots 1 to 3 in FIG. 4). For example, in the case of setting 1, the probability variation inrush rate is 45%, and in the case of setting 6. Can be set such that the probability variation inrush rate is 50%, and the higher the set value is, the higher the probability is. The same applies to the time saving inrush rate (total symbol selection rate for time saving big hits).
In any case, as the setting becomes higher, the ball ejection performance (machine discount) may be determined to be advantageous to the player.

After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start opening winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "variation at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation hold ball is subjected to the variation display operation. A'look-ahead variation pattern determination'that determines in advance the pattern lottery (step S413 in FIG. 12, which will be described later) is performed.

Specifically, for the pre-reading symbol determination result (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) and the variation pattern acquired in step S314. Using a random number (magnitude of random number value: 10000), the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the operation hold ball this time is pre-read and determined. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined. Since this pre-reading determination predetermines the variation pattern at the start of the variation, the “look-ahead determination table (not shown) having the same basic configuration as the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 described later. ) ”. In the case of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is provided as a table for both pre-reading determination and fluctuation start time.

For example, it will be described using the “hit fluctuation pattern distribution table” of FIG. 24. In the figure, the notation of "probability" means probabilistic jackpot, the notation of "hour" means time-saving jackpot, and the notation of "probability 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7" means probabilistic jackpot 1-7, "hour". "1, 2" means a time-saving jackpot 1, 2. With reference to FIG. 24, for example, the pre-reading symbol result of this time is "probability variation jackpot 1 (probability 1)", and the variation pattern selection mode Tcode (current game state) is "00H (general mode)". When the random number for the pattern is a value belonging to the judgment value (judgment area 0 to 49) of "normal fluctuation direct hit", the illustrated EVENT1 "21H" (see the column of EVENT1 of "normal fluctuation direct hit") To be acquired. The Arabic numeral shown in FIG. 24 indicates a judgment value (size of the judgment area) (the same applies to FIGS. 25 to 27). For example, when the random number for the fluctuation pattern belongs to the judgment values 0 to 49, "normal fluctuation direct hit". When "hit" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000) and belongs to the judgment values 50 to 129, "normal medium N reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000) and belongs to the judgment values 130 to 209. Is set to select "normal SP reach A" (selection rate: 80/10000).

This EVENT 1 is the data (winning command data 1) used for creating the hold addition command, and is the data of the second byte (lower byte) of the hold addition command. As a result, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" acquired in step S315 of the pre-processing is updated to a data value (excluding the reserved ball number information) that specifies the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern in this processing, and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is obtained. The type is specified. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, the number of balls on hold during the look-ahead determination is not taken into consideration. The reason is as follows. At the stage of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of operation-holding balls (see the column of the number of operation-holding balls in FIGS. 24 to 27). However, at the time of pre-reading determination, since the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination does not always match the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation, it is not possible to determine an accurate fluctuation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the variation pattern type (basic pattern), which is the essence of the variation pattern at the start of the variation, is determined without considering the number of balls on hold at the time of the look-ahead determination. For example, referring to the columns of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal medium N reach A in the “loss fluctuation pattern distribution table” shown in FIG. 26, at the start of fluctuation, any of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s is normal. Different data (see the COM2 (variation pattern specification command data) column) are acquired in order to identify the fluctuation or normal N reach A, but at the time of pre-reading determination, the operation pending ball number does not matter. , The data (EVEN1 "01H") common to the normal fluctuation 4s to the normal fluctuation 12s and the normal medium N reach A is acquired.

After completing a series of look-ahead determination processes in steps S318 to S321 above, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is subsequently acquired based on the current number of pending balls and the special symbol type (Special Figure 1). "B6H to B9H" is acquired according to 1 to 4 activated holding balls, and "BBH to BEH" is acquired according to 1 to 4 activated reserved balls), and the acquired prize is obtained. Based on the command data 2 (MODE) and the top entry prize command data 1 (look-ahead fluctuation pattern specification information) on the lower byte (EVENT) side, a "hold addition command" is created (step S322) and stored in the RAM 203. (Since the data related to the hold addition command is unnecessary thereafter), the data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). If the look-ahead is prohibited or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, so that the hold addition command having the "look-ahead prohibition data" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. (Refer to the processing route of step S315 → S322 or S316 → S322).

When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command can execute the look-ahead notice if the information included in the hold addition command is "other than the pre-reading prohibition designation". A lottery (look-ahead notice lottery) is performed, and if this is won, a pre-reading notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation pending ball is controlled to appear. On the other hand, in the case of "pre-reading prohibition designation", the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is forcibly processed as a loss, and the occurrence of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, the hold addition command for which read-ahead prohibition is specified is transmitted in both cases where read-ahead prohibition is in progress or a setting error error occurs. The reason is as follows. ..

In the case of the present embodiment, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled even if a setting abnormality error occurs. The first reason is that the resolution of the setting error is solved by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter that is enthusiastic from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust in the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the symbol fluctuation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If this happens, the profit that the player should originally obtain will be lost, causing the player to feel distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, if a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The reason for expressing "conditionally" here is that when a setting abnormality error occurs, pre-reading notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (FIG. 11). Step S317 (= 5AH), step S409 (= 5AH) in FIG. 12, which will be described later). The reason why the game is proceeded as it is "conditionally" in this way is that when a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and if no other measures are taken, the effect control process or the effect control process This is because there is a risk that the jackpot lottery will not be executed correctly.

Then, the set value command is transmitted (step S324). This "setting value command" includes information that can specify the current setting value, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side displays and controls the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect based on the set value. .. The set value command is transmitted every time an operation hold ball is generated in the start port check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can control the appearance of the advance notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect using the look-ahead advance notice) related to the operation holding ball based on the correct set value information. As a result, the special figure 1 start port check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start port check process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start processing.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), the special figure 2 FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is zero (step S402), and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is zero. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of pending balls in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operating hold balls in both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation hold ball". Will be. This "no operation hold ball" state is a state in which a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory. Therefore, if "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status when the above "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (process during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 16A described later). (Refer to step S472), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. When the effect control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a demo movie for explaining and introducing (demonstrating) the game related to the gaming machine 1 is played based on a predetermined execution condition. ) ”Is revealed. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation hold ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) is set. If it has passed, the customer waiting effect will appear. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting effect elapses, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of this symbol variation display game is continuously displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. However, the speaker 43 has a "demo start waiting effect" that is in a mute state (may be executing a predetermined sound effect), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts. Further, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting effect and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen). In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed without the operation holding ball being generated and the menu screen (game setting screen) being switched to after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen). , The effect mode is changed to the power saving mode, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the power saving screen (for example, the character display of "Power saving is in progress" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decorative lamp 45 or other effect LEDs or Control to turn off everything (power saving control).

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. It should be noted that the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below is substantially different only in the difference between the target of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the target of the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side of this time, and is "00H" if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processes of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the reserved storage number n = 1 is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , Hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and hold. 4 Clear the storage area and provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation hold balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation hold balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. It is possible to specify whether it corresponds to the area and to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. do. The game state information included in the game state specification command may be any information that is at least necessary for performing the target game process, and is, for example, information including the current internal game state and / or the current variation pattern selection mode. can do. Further, as a game state specification command, an "internal game information command" that can specify the game state determination number YJ and / or a "distribution mode specification command" that can specify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be transmitted. can do.

Further, here, if necessary, a "time reduction count command" including information on the special symbol time reduction count counter (time reduction count information) and an "ST count command" including information on the special symbol probability variation counter (ST count information) are used. Will be sent. The effect control unit 24 grasps the remaining time reduction number and the remaining ST number based on the information included in these commands, and informs the remaining time reduction number or the remaining ST number in an effectful manner. Countdown display) ”is configured to be controllable. Specifically, as the residual number of times display effect, the "remaining time reduction display effect" is displayed in the time saving mode, and the "residual ST number display effect" is displayed in the ST mode. Since the time reduction command and the ST number command transmitted in this process are transmitted with counter values in which the current game amount is not subtracted (the counter subtraction process is a special case of FIGS. 16A to 16B at the end of the game). During the processing during the symbol confirmation time (S479, S484)), the effect control unit 24 appropriately performs subtraction processing on the grasped counter value, and is configured to be able to display the remaining number of times display effect (described later). The same applies to the ceiling count command). However, in the case of this embodiment, the time reduction count command is transmitted when the special symbol time reduction counter is other than zero (the time reduction counter ≠ 0), and the ST count command is also sent when the special symbol probability variation counter is other than zero. It is transmitted when (the probability variation counter value ≠ 0). Of course, even if the counter value is zero, the time saving command or the ST number command including the information that is zero may be transmitted.

Depending on the game state, it is possible to determine whether to send only the time reduction command, the ST command, or both commands. However, when the infinite ceiling privilege is given, specifically, "infinite time reduction" with no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite probability change" or "infinite latent probability" with no limit on the number of STs, or real When an unlimited number of times (65536 times, etc.) is set and an infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite latency that can be regarded as an "infinite number of times" is given, the game state related to the privilege. In (in this embodiment, the heaven mode), in order to reduce the control load, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted. Further, when the time saving state or the probability change state given by the big hit winning is to continue until the next big hit, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted in the same manner.

Further, the above-mentioned "residual number display effect" can be configured to be able to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the ST mode, and the heaven mode. It should be noted that the effect of displaying the remaining number of times related to the infinite system is preferable to the effect mode of notifying that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, in the case of an image display effect, "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(About the display of the number of remaining ceilings)
Further, in the game state information transmission process in step S408, a "ceiling count command" including information on the number of remaining ceiling games (information about the ceiling counter described later) is also transmitted. The effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling based on the information included in the ceiling number command, and controls the appearance of the above-mentioned “residual ceiling number display effect”. In the case of the present embodiment, this residual ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the precursor mode (precursor effect mode).

The above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" can appear in all or part of the monitoring target (count target) period of the ceiling game. In the present embodiment, it can appear in "general mode" and / or "precursor mode". Further, when the residual ceiling number display effect is displayed in the normal mode, the effect mode can be different between the general mode and the precursor mode. For example, in the general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is notified to a small display area in the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display is displayed small), and in the precursor mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in the large display area in the center of the LCD screen. Notification (countdown display is displayed in large size) can be displayed.

(Processing route when the set value is normal: Processing route that follows S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling function management process: Fig. 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process of managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the “ceiling counter” is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is used as a counter for managing the number of games that triggers the setting of data regarding the granting of ceiling benefits ( See steps S903 to S904 (ceiling flag ON) described later, step S915 in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12). The above-mentioned "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of times a specific event is executed, the number of times it is established, the number of times it occurs, and the like, and functions as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (ceiling privilege granting trigger). The "specific event" here means execution of a symbol variation display game (hit fluctuation or loss fluctuation), winning of a big hit or small hit or loss, transition to a specific gaming state (transition to a specific game mode or specification). (Transition to the fluctuation pattern selection mode, or transition to a specific internal gaming state), execution of a big hit game or a small hit, and a specific event such as the establishment of a specific condition related to the game. In the present embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such a counting means is, for example, in the modification 1 and the modification 2 (FIGS. 33, 34, grant forms (α) to (μ)) of the privilege granting form described later, the ceiling activation trigger or the predetermined privilege granting. It is used as a functional unit to monitor the arrival of an opportunity.

When the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited as it is without doing anything. The initial value is set in the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared by the RAM clear in the area (step S031) during the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 8, or from another game mode to the normal mode. This is the case of transition, that is, the transition of the internal gaming state to the normal state (see steps S481 and S486 in FIG. 16B described later).

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1 (step S902), and if the subtraction result is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is exited and zero. If (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has become zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process in step S412 described later (see step S915 in FIG. 15). As a result, the ceiling function management process is omitted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, when the ceiling function management process in step S420 is completed, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is then executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the big hit determination random number value is used to execute a "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing of step S318 of FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the processing target side this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the hit random number table for the special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and the winning lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table is executed. Then, if the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and if the lottery result is "small hit", the small hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and "big hit" and "small hit" are set. If none of the "hits" is won, that is, in the case of "missing", "00H" is set for both the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag.

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling activation management process: Fig. 14>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. In this ceiling activation management process, necessary setting processes related to the granting of ceiling benefits are performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the current game result is a “big hit” (step S920).

When the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (step S911: ≠ 5AH), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to grant the ceiling privilege), and when the flag is ON, the ceiling privilege is given. It is specified that the ceiling privilege is not given when the flag is OFF. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when the ceiling counter becomes zero in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later (step 15 in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process). See S915-S916). When this ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that the ceiling activation trigger has arrived in this game (step S921: = 5AH), and the processing necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (steps S922-S925) is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠ 5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

When the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S921: = 5AH), the processing necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412) described later is set in the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting process). As a result, it is controlled to the designated ceiling privilege state. In the case of this embodiment, a finite time reduction (time reduction state of 100 times reduction) is specified, and the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "01H" in the precursor mode to "06H" in the ceiling mode. It has become. Then, as the end process when the ceiling privilege is given, each state buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processes when the ceiling is activated), and then the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (step). S924 to S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command including finite time reduction (time reduction state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, it is controlled to a finite time reduction state with the start of this game (1000th game), and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) described later, and the ceiling effect mode. The production below will appear.

Returning to the explanation of step S911, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911: = 5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, even in the ceiling game, it is controlled to the "ceiling activation prohibited state", and the processing when the jackpot is won is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order to be granted the ceiling privilege, it is a condition that you have been addicted to 1000 games. As described above, in the present embodiment, the monitored game section of the number of hamari games (the number of consecutive losses) is set to 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling privilege is given when the game is addicted between the games. ing.

(Modification example 1 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
If the jackpot is won, the ceiling privilege may be given without controlling the ceiling function to the prohibited state. However, in this case, it will be a ceiling privilege only for this game (only for one game). This is because the big hit game will start after the end of this game. However, even if it is a ceiling privilege for only one game, if a time saving state or a probable change state accompanied by a state with electric support is given, the benefit of electric support will be provided until the end of this symbol change display game. Can receive. Specifically, there is an advantage that the winning of the lower starting port 35 is facilitated, and the operation holding ball on the special figure 2 side is likely to be generated. As a ceiling privilege, when a game state with electric support is given, at least the "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. 7 may be displayed in this game to encourage the player to right-handed. preferable.

(Modification example 2 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the ceiling privilege is given when the game starts is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the ceiling privilege is given when the game ends may be used. That is, the structure is such that the ceiling is activated at the end of the ceiling game. In the case of this modification, the ceiling privilege will be granted immediately after the end of the symbol variation display game. For example, if the ceiling privilege is a finite working hours, it can be in the working hours immediately after the end of 1000 games. If the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", the big hit game (forced hit game) by forced hit will be started after 1000 games are completed. When the end of the game is used as the trigger for activating the ceiling, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B) described later, which is related to the process at the end of the symbol variation display game, for example. It may be executed after the process of step S495.

(Modification example 3 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the ceiling privilege is given in the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling is based on the fact that the second grant condition is satisfied after the first grant condition is satisfied. Benefits may be granted. For example, if 1000 games are addicted (the first grant condition is satisfied), the ceiling privilege grant right is established, and the ceiling privilege is granted after the predetermined number of precursor games have been exhausted (the grant of the ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended, and multiple games are granted. Scheduled first). In this case, the number of precursor games can be determined by providing a plurality of types of precursor games (for example, 1 to 16 games) and drawing lots (lottery for the number of precursor games). When the number of precursor games is determined by lottery, the lottery probability of each precursor game may be the same in all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games. If determined, it is possible to give the player a setting guessing factor based on the difference in the number of games. Further, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, a lottery probability can be determined according to the set value, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modification example 4 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the above-mentioned modification 3, an example in which the ceiling privilege granting right is temporarily suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games is exhausted, that is, an example in which the right holding period depends on the number of times the game is executed has been described. However, the right holding period does not depend on the number of times the game is executed, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, it is a "timed type" ceiling granting form in which a ceiling privilege is granted when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game. In this case, using the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling privilege, an effect of notifying in advance that a finite time reduction will occur soon, for example, "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. It is possible to make the player put out and urge the player to hit the right side to the player who is hitting the left side, and prevent the player from making a wasteful hit.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, when the ceiling activation management process of step S421 is completed, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "design lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed by using the winning lottery result in step S410 and the random value for determining the special symbol. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, a symbol table (either a big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the winning lottery result in step S410. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit judgment flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', "special". "Big hit symbol table for FIG. 1" is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, the symbol lottery based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination is executed, and the special symbol determination which is the lottery result is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area, respectively.

When the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Fig. 15>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit is won, data for designating a transition destination game state (see FIG. 4) after the big hit game is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (Steps S911 to S914), which is a loss and is divided into a process (steps S915, S916, S917) for storing data for designating the ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer when the ceiling flag is ON. ing. First, the processing content of the former "when a big hit is won" will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911: = 5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is acquired (step S912). Next, referring to the acquired jackpot game state transition table selection table, the current game state (game state at the time of winning (game state determination number YJ in this embodiment)) and the hit type (special symbol determination data) Acquires the game state transition table (any of JTTBL-1 to 5) according to the above (step S913), and stores the data defined in the acquired game state transition table in various state buffers (step S914: state). Buffer setting process). In this game state transition table, various data for shifting to the target game state are defined. JTTBL-1 to 5 are provided in the game state transition table according to the present embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, JTTBL-1 is "time saving A" and JTTBL-2 is "time saving B". , JTTBL-3 is defined as "probability change A", JTTBL-4 is defined as "probability change B", and JTTBL-5 is defined as "probability change C".

The value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot end process (see step S509 in FIG. 17 and step S592 in FIG. 18 showing the details thereof) shown in FIG. It is stored in the flag storage area and the counter storage area corresponding to each state buffer), whereby the game state after the big hit game (the transition destination game state in FIG. 4) is specified.

The roles of the various state buffers are as follows.
(Α) "Public accessory open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON / OFF designation data of each function for designating the internal game state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, the normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function, and the normal symbol operating state that specifies the normal symbol probability change function. Data for the symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function, and the special symbol probability change state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability change function are set.
(Β) "Special symbol time reduction counter buffer"
Data for specifying the number of times the operation of the special symbol time reduction function is continued (data for the special symbol time reduction counter) is set.
(Γ) "Special symbol probability variation counter buffer"
Data for specifying the number of times the operation of the special symbol probability change function is continued (data for the special symbol probability change number counter) is set.
(Δ) "Special symbol fluctuation count counters 1 to 3 buffers"
Data for designating the number of continuations of a specific fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) (data for a special symbol fluctuation count counter) is set.
(Ε) "Variation pattern distribution designation numbers 1 to 3 buffers"
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) that specifies the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be the update destination is set.

For example, when the current game state is "normal state (YJ = 00H)" and "probability change jackpot 2 (5R probability change ST75)" is won, "JTTBL" is based on the game state transition table selection table shown in FIG. -4 ”, that is, the game state transition table (see FIG. 22) for the probability change B is acquired. In this case, "5AH (ON designation)" is set in the general electric accessory open extension transition state buffer to the special symbol probability change transition state buffer, and "25 times" is set in the special symbol time reduction counter buffer, and the special symbol is set. "75 times" is set in the probability variation counter buffer. As a result, the transition destination game state after the big hit game is designated as "time reduction number 25 + ST number 75". Further, as the game mode transition designation data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer, and "25 times (ST early stage mode continuation count)" is set in the special symbol change count counter 1 buffer. Is set, "02H (ST middle stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 2 buffer, and "50 times (ST middle stage mode continuation count)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation count counter 2 buffer. NS. As a result, the game mode transition mode of "ST early mode 25 times ⇒ ST middle mode 50 times ⇒ time saving mode" is specified.

(Variation example of S.ST number / time reduction number: ST number or time reduction number differs depending on the set value)
In this embodiment, when the same big hit is won, the same game state transition table is selected regardless of the set value. That is, regardless of the current setting of 1 to 6, for example, if the probability variation jackpot 1 is won, the probability variation state (probability variation A (ST100 mode)) specified by JTTBL-3 is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the same big hit is won, it may be shifted to a probabilistic state in which the number of STs is different or a time saving state in which the number of time reductions is different, depending on the set value. In this case, at least the data values related to the special symbol probability variation counter and / or the special symbol time reduction counter may be configured so that different gaming state transition tables can be selected according to the set values.

Further, although the case where the same big hit is won has been described above, it is also possible to focus on different big hits and have the following configuration. For example, depending on the set value, the presence / absence of a specific number of STs or the presence / absence of a specific number of time reductions may be determined. Specifically, in the case of the first set value, there is a specific jackpot that gives a specific number of STs, and in the case of the second set value, the specific jackpot does not exist. That is, in the case of the first set value, the "specific jackpot" is included in the jackpot lottery target, but in the case of the second set value, the "specific jackpot" is not included in the jackpot lottery target.

With the above configuration, if a specific probabilistic jackpot (which may be a latent jackpot) or a specific time-saving jackpot is won, the playability as described in (SA) and (SB) below is created. be able to.

(SA) For example, when a specific probability change jackpot is won, different ST times may be set for each set value (settings 1 to 6) (shifted to a probability change state with different ST times), or at least. A different number of STs may be set in the set value of 1 (at least the set value of 1 is shifted to a probabilistic state of the number of STs different from the other set values). As a typical example, in the case of the former, when the same probability variation jackpot is won, for example, "the number of STs of settings 1 to 6 is 100 to 105 times" (one of the set values is found according to the number of STs). Case). In the latter example, when the same probability variation jackpot is won, for example, "settings 1 to 5 have 100 ST times, setting 6 has 101 times" (a case where setting 6 is confirmed by digesting 101 ST times) or " Settings 1 to 4 have 100 STs, and settings 5 and 6 have 101 times. It can be "times" and so on.
In addition, in the case of focusing on different probabilistic big hits, for example, "among the hit types subject to the big hit lottery, if the first hit is won, the first ST number (for example, ST100 times) is set, and if the second hit is won. Is the second ST number (for example, 105 times) different from the first ST number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. ”
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variation jackpot is won, the number of STs differs depending on the set value, so that it is possible to suggest the setting according to the number of STs. Specifically, when the number of STs is specific, any of settings 1 to 6 can be found, or in a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 negation, setting 6 confirmation, etc.). It turns out that there is. In other words, it is possible to create a novel playability such as creating a function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect by using the "ST number of times".

(SB) Further, even when a specific time saving jackpot is won, different time saving times may be set for each set value (settings 1 to 6), or at least one setting value may be set for a different time saving number of times. You may. In addition, in the case of focusing on different probabilistic big hits, for example, "Among the hit types subject to the big hit lottery, if the first hit is won, the number of times of the first time reduction (for example, 100 times of the time reduction) is set, and the second hit is won. If this is the case, the second time reduction number (for example, 105 times) different from the first time reduction number is used, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. " In these cases as well, as in the configuration of (SA) described above, when the number of time reductions is specific, either setting 1 to 6 or a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, It is possible to make setting suggestions according to the number of time reductions, such as setting 1 denial, setting 6 confirmation, etc.), and the novelty of creating the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect using the "time reduction number of times". It is possible to create a certain playability.

The specific jackpot in this example may be one or more jackpots. As the specific jackpot, it is preferable that the jackpot has the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, the probability variation jackpot 1) or the jackpot with the lowest advantage (profit state). The reason is as described below. The jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that cannot be won in the middle. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information of "setting suggestion" as a privilege. In addition, the jackpot with the lowest advantage (profit state) has a low profit even if the jackpot is won with difficulty, and it becomes a disappointing jackpot for the player, which may reduce the player's willingness to play. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information of "setting suggestion" to prevent the player's motivation to play.

The configuration of the above (SA) can be, for example, the configuration of the following (SA-1).
(SA-1)
When the starting means detects a game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, and a lottery means.
A symbol display means that displays a variation of a symbol and displays a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol.
When the lottery result by the above lottery means is a hit, the hit game execution control means for controlling the execution of the hit game and the hit game execution control means.
After the winning game is completed, until the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit, the lottery probability of winning is higher than the predetermined normal probability (specifically, high probability). It is equipped with a probability fluctuation control means that can control the game state accompanied by the probability state (probability change state or latent state).
A gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the above-mentioned winning lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in multiple stages.
The setting value that can be changed in multiple stages includes at least the first setting value and the second setting value.
The above probability fluctuation control means
When the set value is the first set value, if the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit number is reached.
When the set value is the second set value, if the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is reached until the second upper limit, which is different from the first upper limit, is reached. It can be configured to control.

Further, the above (SA-1) may be configured as described below (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The above probability fluctuation control means
When the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit is reached.
When the second hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the second upper limit, which is different from the first upper limit, is reached.
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second hit may not be included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

In the case of the above (SB) configuration, instead of the probability fluctuation control means, "the ball entry state into the starting means is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (normal state)" (electric support state). An advantageous game state control means for controlling the advantageous game state (time saving state) accompanied by the above is provided. and,
The above-mentioned advantageous game state control means is
When the set value is the first set value, if the first hit is won by the lottery means, the advantageous gaming state is controlled until the first upper limit number is reached.
When the set value is the second set value, if the first hit is won by the lottery means, the advantageous gaming state is entered until the second upper limit, which is different from the first upper limit, is reached. The configuration may be such that it is controlled.

(If the jackpot is not won (missing) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again. When the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911: ≠ 5AH) and the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S915: = 5AH), the ceiling activation start pre-processing (pre-processing for granting the ceiling privilege). As a part of the above, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S916). In this process, the ceiling activation flag set to the ON state is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 23 is acquired (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (finite time reduction to infinite latency) are exemplified as the game state transition table for the ceiling corresponding to various ceiling benefits. Actually, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be provided according to the ceiling privilege type.

Next, the data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table is stored in the above-mentioned state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (see step S421 and step S922 in FIG. 14), and the predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (each of them) are the same as in the case where the jackpot is won. It is stored in the flag storage area or counter storage area corresponding to the status buffer of. As a result, the game state related to the ceiling privilege is specified. In addition, "* (times)" and "* (H)" in the figure are arbitrary data values, and mean that appropriate values can be set according to playability and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, "finite time reduction (time reduction number of times 100)" is typically described as a ceiling privilege, and in this case, the data value as shown in the "finite time reduction" column in the figure is determined. Has been done.

When both the jackpot determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (when step S911 is ≠ 5AH and step S915 ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Returning to the description of the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 12 again. After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, an variation pattern distribution table corresponding to at least the current gaming state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) in step S411 is acquired. In the case of the present embodiment, the current set value, the current fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the symbol lottery result, and the number of operation-holding balls (excluding the operation-holding balls used for the variation display operation this time), the existing operation-holding balls A "variable pattern distribution table" corresponding to (several 0 to 3) is acquired.

(Variable pattern distribution table: FIGS. 24 to 27)
FIGS. 24 to 27 show fluctuation pattern distribution tables. FIG. 24 shows a variation pattern distribution table for each of "general use, precursor, ceiling, time reduction, and heaven time reduction", and FIG. 25 shows variation for each of "ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage". "Pattern distribution table", Fig. 26 shows each loss fluctuation pattern distribution table for "general use, precursor, ceiling, time reduction, heaven time reduction", and Fig. 27 shows ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage. It shows each "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" for. Further, "FB1 to FB17" shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 are the hit variation pattern distribution table types selected at the time of winning, and "FH1 to FH21" shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 are the hit variation selected at the time of loss. The pattern distribution table type is shown.

The "heaven time reduction" (see the "time reduction / heaven time reduction" column) of the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 and 26 is the same table as the time reduction mode, but the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the heaven time reduction is used. A distribution table may be provided. In addition, a dedicated variable pattern distribution table can be provided as appropriate according to the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite probability change or infinite probability change, there is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability change", and in the case of finite probability change or infinite probability change, there is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability change". In the case of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a variation pattern distribution table common to the time saving mode is selected in order to give "finite working hours" as a ceiling privilege. Further, although not shown, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided with a fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, the probability that one or more specific fluctuation patterns are drawn may differ depending on the set value, and the setting guessing element can be given according to the appearance rate of the effect related to the fluctuation pattern. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, in each variation pattern distribution table, one or a plurality of variation patterns are displayed in the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) and the number of operation hold balls (operation hold provided for the variation display operation this time). It is determined in relation to the number of existing pending balls (excluding balls), the symbol lottery result, and the random value for the fluctuation pattern. As shown in the figure, various fluctuation patterns are provided as the types of fluctuation patterns. The relationship between winning expectations is as follows. The relationship between the same type of reach is "N reach A <N reach B" between N reach and "SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C" between SP reach. The relationship between different types of reach is "N reach A <N reach B <SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C <special reach". In addition, when the pseudo-ream and other notice effects appear in combination, the winning expectation changes, and the SP reach A with a low winning expectation, for example, "SP reach B <pseudo 3 + SP reach A", is the SP. May exceed reach B or C. The fanning reach is mainly provided as a special reach selected when a special figure 2 is won when hitting left in the normal mode. In the figure, the N reach is illustrated without the pseudo-reach, but in reality, the N reach with the pseudo-ream (for example, pseudo 2 + N reach A, pseudo 2 + N reach B, etc.) is included, and pseudo 3 or more. When is accompanied by, the occurrence of SP reach is confirmed.

The variation pattern determination processing method is basically the same as that described above at the time of pre-reading variation pattern determination (starting opening winning random number determination process (step S320 in FIG. 11)). Here, one of the fluctuation patterns is determined according to the random value for the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern distribution table (variation pattern designation command data shown in FIGS. 24 to 27). COM2 is acquired). Then, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the corresponding fluctuation time is determined (see the “TIME” column in the figure). This fluctuation time (execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game) is set in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area.

The information regarding the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least different winning / losing lottery results (in the case of the present embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command). It can include the current game state, variable time information, and execution designation information of a specific advance notice effect (presence / absence and type of reach effect, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.). The main control unit 20 creates a "variation pattern designation command" (“COM2” shown in FIGS. 24 to 27) that makes it possible to specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the fluctuation pattern specification command is used when the effect control unit 24 determines various effects (notice effect during change, setting suggestion effect during change) that should appear during this symbol change display game. Used for.

(About characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, the characteristic elements related to the fluctuation pattern will be described while paying attention to the point of having a plurality of types of ST modes and the point of having a ceiling function.

The above-mentioned fluctuation state (high-speed, medium-speed, low-speed fluctuation state) in each game mode is realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group defined in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 26 to 27 and the selection rate thereof. Therefore, it is possible to change the fluctuation state under each game mode depending on what kind of fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution table. For example, referring to the “ST middle-use loss fluctuation pattern distribution table” shown in FIG. 27, in the early stage of ST, in order to realize a high-speed fluctuation state, the normal fluctuation on the special figure 2 side (variation pattern belonging to the normal fluctuation pattern). The shortest fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time of 2s is selected with high probability. Further, in the middle stage of ST and the final stage of ST, a fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 3s, normal fluctuation 4s) having a longer fluctuation time is selected with high probability, whereby the fluctuation state at medium speed and the fluctuation at low speed are selected. Realize the state. Further, as shown in FIG. 27, at the time of loss, reach is easily selected in the order of ST final stage, ST middle stage, and ST early stage mode (in the case of this embodiment, the reach selection rate is zero in the early stage of ST), and the reach is easily selected. The fluctuation time is also relatively long, and from this point as well, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is relatively long in this order of ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage mode. It has become.

Further, in the ST early stage mode, only the normal variable type is selected at the time of loss, and only the reach (direct hit reach) is selected at the time of winning. In other words, during the early stages of ST (within 1 to 25 games), it becomes "correct" when the reach is reached. In this embodiment, if a player wins in the early stage of ST, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FB9" is selected regardless of the special symbol type, the number of pending balls, and the winning type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which different fluctuation pattern distribution tables can be selected according to the jackpot type, such as the ST middle stage mode and the ST final stage mode, may be used.

Further, by utilizing the fact that there are a plurality of types of ST modes, the following configurations (I) and (II) can be configured.
(I) A Tcode dedicated to the final round of the ST mode may be provided so that a specific fluctuation pattern (final fanning fluctuation) can be selected in the final round. The Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one ST mode of the ST early stage mode, the ST middle stage mode, and the ST final stage mode. For example, "ST early stage final fanning A, ST middle stage final fanning A, ST final stage final fanning A" shown in Remarks 2 to 4 in FIG. 25 (at the time of big hit), and "Remarks 2 to 4 in FIG. 27 (at the time of loss)" The final fanning B at the beginning of ST, the final fanning B at the middle stage of ST, and the final fanning B at the end of ST. In this case, the following effects can be produced. Typically, taking the final game of the ST early stage mode (25th game in ST) as an example, in the final game, "ST early stage final fanning A" is selected at the time of a big hit, and "ST early stage final fanning A" is selected at the time of a big hit. "B" is selected. At this time, in any of the symbol variation display games related to the final fanning A and B in the early stage of ST, a common effect is displayed during a predetermined time from the start of the game (until the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the game). Try to fuel the expectation of being a loser or a big hit. Then, if it is lost, it is stopped at the "missing pattern (blank eye)" without applying reach, and if it is a big hit, it is stopped at "matching symbols (hit pattern)" by applying reach (in this example, the reach is It will be correct when it is hung). The fluctuation time of the final fan A (at the time of hit) and the final fan B (at the time of loss) may be the same fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time at the time of the big hit is longer than that at the time of loss, and the winner is won after the reach production. Appearing specific effects such as a blessing effect to congratulate, or a promotion effect that can notify the promotion display of even-numbered symbols to odd-numbered symbols or the non-promotion display from even-numbered symbols to even-numbered symbols depending on the winning jackpot type. It is preferable to let them.

(II) When the winning jackpot type (which may be one or a plurality of specific jackpot types) is set as a concealed state and the destination game state is set as a concealed state (in the effect during the symbol variation display game and the effect during the hit). , When the winning jackpot type is kept secret), for example, in the final game of the ST early mode (ST25th game), if there is a loss, whether the ST mode ends or continues by using the final ST early game The "continuous fanning production" is revealed. For example, when the current game mode is ST25 mode, a continuation failure effect for notifying ST discontinuation is displayed as a result of the continuation fanning effect, and when it is ST75 or ST100 mode, ST continuation is notified. Make a continuous success production appear.

Any of the above-mentioned configurations (I) and (II) can arouse the tension of the player in the final ST game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Further, the above-mentioned "final fanning fluctuation" may be configured to be selectable in all ST modes or some ST modes. However, in the ST mode that forms a "high-speed fluctuation state" such as the ST early stage mode, it is preferable to configure the final fanning fluctuation to be selectable. Under the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the player continues to lose without winning the big hit, the ST (probability change state) will end in a blink of an eye, and the player will feel more disappointed. Therefore, it is preferable to select the "final fanning fluctuation" in the final round so that the player's feeling of tension is maintained, in terms of improving the fun of the game. Further, the configuration is not limited to the final ST game, and the "final fan" may be continuously selected from the games one or a plurality of games before the final game. For example, "final fanning" is continuously selected between the three games of the ST23 to 25th games.

(About the fluctuation pattern related to the ceiling mode)
Further, with reference to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the “ceiling” column in the figure, the common “ceiling fluctuation” is performed regardless of the special figure type and the number of pending balls. Is now selected. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of loss, "common ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "type of special figure, number of balls on hold, and type of loss". The reason for doing this is as described below. First, when reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to display a common ceiling effect at least regardless of the type of special figure and the number of balls on hold, and notify the ceiling activation (granting the ceiling privilege). Secondly, preparing multiple types of variable pattern distribution tables for one ceiling game only (one rotation only) and displaying an effect based on this increases the control burden and reduces the control burden. This is because it is not preferable from the viewpoint of. Further, in the case of hitting, as in the case of the above-mentioned "loss", the configuration described below is provided from the viewpoint of directing and reducing the control load. As already explained, in the ceiling game (1000th game), if a big hit is won by chance, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but in the normal effect mode (for example, the general mode). It is preferable to show the effect at the time of winning according to (in the middle or the precursor mode) (see the description of "7-4-1. About the effect in the ceiling mode" above). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the loss variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, when the jackpot is won, the hit variation pattern related to the normal mode (general mode and / or precursor mode) is applied. "FB2" is selected from the distribution tables FB1 to FB4. In addition, it is not limited to "FB2", and may be any of FB1 to FB4.

(About the fluctuation pattern related to the precursor mode)
Further, paying attention to the "precursor mode" of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the case of this embodiment, in the precursor mode, the high-speed fluctuation state (during the normal mode) in which the fluctuation state is the fastest among the normal modes. , The game mode with the fastest average digestion time). This is in consideration of the player's feelings. It is thought that many players will become more motivated to "get to the ceiling quickly when they come to this point" and "to get the ceiling benefits quickly" when they get close to the ceiling. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average digestion time in the precursor mode is increased. Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the big hit is won in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 24, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 common to the general mode are adopted, but the present invention uses this. Not limited to this, a hit variation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, a "precursor per variability" can be provided as a dedicated hit variability during the precursor mode (see Remark 2 "precursor per variability" in FIG. 24).

In addition, when the final game in the precursor mode is "missing", a specific fluctuation pattern (variation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time) is selected in order to bring out the above-mentioned "pre-launch guidance notification effect". It may be a possible configuration (see Remark 2 “Precursor Final Fluctuation” in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect of instructing "how to hit" in the game before the game in which the state with electric support occurs, and the game in which the conventional state with electric support occurs (probability change). Or a launch guidance notification effect such as instructing "right-handed" in a game that causes a short time, or instructing "left-handed" in the game in which there is no electric support, that is, there is actually electric support. It has a different character from the notification effect that instructs how to hit in the game in which nothing occurs. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect peculiar to a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling privilege.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again. After completing the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the processing target (variation start side) this time, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of specifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) that are finally stopped and displayed, and a combination of decorative symbols. It is used when performing a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 starts the present decorative symbol variation display game based on the information contained in these commands, and controls the appearance of various effects during the variation. do.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, the processing content when it is determined in step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when it is determined that a setting error has occurred will be described. do.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process of step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (winning lottery) is skipped, and the special stop of step S411 is performed. Proceed to the design creation process. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the winning lottery result this time is always processed as "loss" (forced loss control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, the variation pattern dedicated to the error may be selected, or the existing specific variation pattern may be selected. However, considering that a serious error such as a setting abnormality error has occurred, it is preferable to select only the normal fluctuation, not the reach fluctuation.

<A. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 10>
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described.

In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol accessory operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuation time T has not elapsed (variation time T ≠ 0), the special symbol is changing, so that the special symbol changing process is exited without doing anything. When the variation time T of the special symbol has elapsed (variation time T = 0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. .. Upon receiving the fluctuation stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (confirms) the decorative symbol being displayed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated at the same time as the special symbol variation display game is terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the OFF state is stored in the special symbol changing flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol is completed, the process during the change of the special symbol is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display of the special symbol is completed.

After exiting the above special symbol changing process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<22. Special symbol confirmation time processing (processing when fluctuation is stopped): Fig. 16A and Fig. 16B>
Next, the process during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol changing process). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination of step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the jackpot is won, and the probability and electric support during the jackpot game are low. Set to the state of no state (clear various flags and counters). Further, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination of step S474, when the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), that is, in the case of "loss" which is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag as various setting processes (process before starting the small hit game) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol are completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). If the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number of this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of terminations of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of ends of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481).

(Setting processing at the end of reduced working hours: step S481)
Here, as the setting process at the end of the reduced working hours, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) is set to the OFF state (general electric accessory open extension state flag, normal symbol time reduction). Set the status flag and the normal symbol probability change status flag to 00H respectively), and set the transition to the "state without electric support". Further, in order to terminate the operation of the special symbol time reduction function, the special symbol time reduction function is set to the OFF state (the special symbol time reduction state flag is set to 00H), and the game status notification LED output number (status notification of the compound display device 38c) is set. Store 00H that specifies the non-special symbol time reduction state in (data) (in the case of "01H", specify the special symbol time reduction state).

The case where the "setting process at the end of the reduced working hours" in step S481 is executed is the case where the gaming mode shifts from the "reduced working hours mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal gaming state is the "reduced working hours state". This is the case of shifting to the "normal state". Therefore, here, the initial value (999 times) is set in the ceiling counter in order to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games with the transition from the next game to the normal state (general mode). In the present embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (999th game), and in the game immediately before the ceiling game, various setting processes before the start of the ceiling privilege, concretely, In the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for designating the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 15). Steps S915-S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set in various flags and counters related to the game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 14). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given at the start of the ceiling game. The ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value. In this case, it is monitored whether or not the ceiling counter has become zero, that is, whether or not it is the 1000th game, and if it is zero. For example, the process may be performed to directly set the specified data related to the ceiling privilege to various flags and counters without going through the state buffer.

(Control processing when a ceiling privilege is given when the game ends)
Here, in the case of a configuration in which the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the game (when the symbol is stopped), as described above, the subroutine “ceiling activation management process (step S421)” may be changed, for example. After the final process (step S495 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time process at the end of the display game, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed. In this case, when 999 is set in the ceiling counter as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the 999 game, and when 1000 is set, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 1000 games. In any case, a specific event related to the game (here, the number of times of loss in the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function activation trigger or the ceiling privilege is given. It may be configured so that it can be granted. If the processing method of this embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B) is adopted, the old model uses the ceiling activation trigger at the start of the game, but the new model uses the ceiling activation trigger at the end of the game. It has the advantage of facilitating design changes and improving compatibility between old and new models.

After finishing the setting process at the end of the reduced working hours in step S481, the game state update process is then executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" in the time saving mode to "00H" in the general mode. The updated game state information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the game state designation command in step S495 described later. Therefore, when the setting process at the end of the reduced working hours in step S481 is executed, the game state specification command transmitted in step S495 described later includes information for designating the "general mode", and the game state specification command is used. The effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving mode (time saving state) has ended in this game, and grasps that the next game shifts to the general mode (normal state). As a result, in the next symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "general mode" is selected, and the effect under the "general effect mode" appears.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST count has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, when the special symbol probability change number counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the ST number has ended, and the setting process at the end of the probability change is executed (step S486). Here, as the setting process at the end of the probabilistic change, the function related to the probabilistic change state is set to the OFF state and the probabilistic change state is ended. However, the processing content differs depending on the value of the special symbol time reduction counter. The details will be described below.

(1) "When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero", in this case, the ST count becomes zero in this game and the ST mode ends. Since the number of time reductions remains, this is a case where the game is switched to the time reduction mode from the next game. That is, it is the case where the number of STs 25 is completed during the ST25 mode, or the case where the number of STs 75 is completed during the ST75 mode (“JTTBL-4, 5” in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22. reference). Therefore, in this case, only the special symbol probability change function is set to the OFF state (00H) (00H is stored in the special symbol probability change state flag), the transition setting from the probability change state to the time saving state is set, and the game state number YJ is set to "02H". (Time saving state) ”. When this process is executed in the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in the subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "when the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time reduction counter is also zero", in this case, the ST count is zero and the time reduction count is also zero in this game. This is the case where the number becomes zero, that is, the case where the player stays in the ST100 mode but the ST100 mode ends in this game (see "JTTBL-3" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, as the process required to end the probability change state, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) is set to the OFF state (general electric accessory open extension state flag, 00H is stored in the normal symbol time saving state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag, respectively), and the special symbol time saving function and the special symbol probability change function are turned off (00H is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag, respectively). ), The game status notification LED output number 00H is stored, the initial value is set in the ceiling counter, and the game status number YJ is updated to "00H (normal state)". The same applies when the latent probability state is terminated (when a finite latent probability jackpot is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (probability change state) is terminated, and the game shifts to the normal mode (general mode) from the next game. In the ST100 mode, when the special symbol probability variation counter becomes zero, the special symbol time reduction counter also becomes zero (when the ST count becomes zero in this game, the time reduction count also becomes zero). ), In the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of time reduction (step S481)" executed when the special symbol time reduction counter becomes zero, the function related to the time reduction state such as the electric chew support function is set to OFF. In this process, only the special symbol probability change function is turned off, and all functions related to the probability change state (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension) are performed. Function) may be set to OFF. Further, regarding the setting of the ceiling counter, the initial value (999 times) may be set in the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of shortened working hours (step S481)", or may be set in this process.

When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, it is nextly determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation number counter is zero (step S488). The determination process of the special symbol change number counter here is mainly monitoring of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) switching game (update game) in the ST mode.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation count counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current fluctuation count, and the special symbol fluctuation count counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that the game is not an update game of the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update game of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the game state update process is executed (step S491). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is updated. The variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) ST early mode ends, (β) ST middle mode ends, (γ) ST late mode ends, and so on. .. To be precise, the update process is performed according to the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes.

In the case of the ST25 mode, since the mode shifts to the time saving mode when the ST early stage mode ends, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from the ST early stage mode "02H" to the time saving mode "05H".

In the case of ST75 mode, when the ST early mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST middle mode (first update). At this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from the ST early mode "02H" to the ST middle mode. Update to "03H". Then, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the time saving mode (second update). At this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "05H" in the time saving mode. do.

In the case of ST100 mode, when the ST early mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST middle mode (first update), so the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set to the ST early mode "02H" as in the case of the above ST75 mode. To "03H" in ST midfield mode. After that, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST final stage mode (second update). At this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "04H" in the ST final stage mode. Update to. Then, when the ST final stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST final stage mode (third update). At this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "04H" in the ST final stage mode to "00H" in the general mode. Update.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode updating means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined modification condition.

Next, when the game state update process of step S491 is completed, the special figure fluctuation number counter update process is then performed (step S492). Here, (1) a process of setting the duration of the ST middle mode (ST count of 50) after the ST count of 25 in the ST early mode has been exhausted (a process of setting the value of the special symbol change count counter 2). , (2) After the ST count of 50 in the ST middle mode has been exhausted, a process of setting the duration of the ST end mode (ST count of 25) (a process of setting the value of the special symbol change count counter 3) is performed. (For the value of the special symbol change count counter to be updated, refer to the columns of the special symbol change count counters 1 to 3 buffers in the game state transition table of FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage modes are realized by the processes of steps S488 to S491.

Next, the precursor mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the precursor mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the number of precursor mode transition trigger games. In the case of this embodiment, since the game enters the precursor mode from the 990th game (see FIG. 7), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in this game (ceiling counter N = 10), the transition to the precursor mode is performed. Perform the setting process. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" in the general mode to "01H" in the precursor mode. As a result, the game shifts to the precursor mode from the 990th game of the next game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the precursor mode is selected, and the effect under the precursor effect mode appears.

After completing the precursor mode transition management process in step S493, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S495). This game state information transmission process transmits a game state designation command in the same manner as the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol change start process shown in FIG. However, the game state designation command transmitted here is information regarding the game state related to the end of the game, that is, information including the content updated in the above steps S482, S491, S494 and the like. Therefore, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the transition of the game state occurs by the game state designation command transmitted in this process, and can control the transition of the effect mode at the end of the current game. For example, even if the 990th game is not started after the 989th game is finished, the daytime background in the general effect mode can be switched to the night background in the precursor mode immediately after the 989th game is finished.

When the game state information transmission process of step S495 is completed, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 17>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit medium flag (step S501). When the small hit middle flag is in the ON state (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit process is performed (step S504), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. In this small hit process, necessary processing for controlling the small hit game operation is executed.

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH), and it is not in the big hit game. Exit the management process.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S502: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S503: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. For the special electric accessory operation status, "start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the big hit game, and "in operation start processing" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the round game ( "01H)", "Operating (02H)" to specify that the round game is being executed, and "Continuing judgment (03H)" to specify that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination" ( One of the processes of steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on whether the status value is any of "03H)" and "big hit end processing (04H)". These processes are processes for executing and controlling the big hit game, and the hit games corresponding to various hits are realized through the processes of steps S505 to S509. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The “big hit start process” in step S505 will be described. At the start of the big hit game, the operation status of the special electric accessory is set to the initial value "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "big hit", this "big hit start process" is executed first.

When entering the big hit start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as the setting process (setting process at the start) necessary for starting the big hit game. As a result, continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes an allowable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H for designating the first 1R is set in the "continuous number counter" for counting the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is set in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the "start interval time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer. To set. The "start interval time (start INT)" means that after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 16A) and the big hit is confirmed, until the special variation winning device 52 is activated (1R round). It is an interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening production section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. The "big hit start command" includes information that can specify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect. It is also used when deciding a series of hit effects (opening effect, in-round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc. corresponding to each big hit type) to be developed inside. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation start process” in step S506 will be described.

Upon entering the special electric accessory operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The interval time before the start of the round is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here. As for this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "big hit start processing (step S505)" is monitored, but this processing is performed in the 2nd and subsequent rounds. When passing through (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (int between Rs) from the end of this round game to the start of the next round game is set. Be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, the interval time before opening (in the case of the 1st round, the start interval time) has elapsed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current number of rounds (consecutive count counter) The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set according to the value) (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Set the winning opening opening / closing operation pattern data).

Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)", and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the “processing during operation of the special electric accessory” in step S507 will be described.

When the special electric accessory is in operation, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and if the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "special electric accessory operation start processing (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum number of winnings is reached. Will be closed. Further, here, every time there is a prize in the large prize opening 50, a "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This big winning opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening and information on the number of winning balls (the setting value information may also be included), and a winning notification that the winning opening 50 has been won. In addition to being used for production, it is also used for controlling the appearance of setting suggestion effects using prize-winning effects. For example, when there is an over-winning that exceeds the maximum number of winnings, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

If the maximum number of prizes is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is "Continued judgment". (03H) ”, and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. This "remaining ball discharge time" refers to the spare time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. Further, with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game), the interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round game and information on the current number of rounds, and the effect control unit 24 performs an effect (inter-round interval effect) during the inter-round interval (R-to-round INT) until the next round. It is used when making it appear. As a result of the above, the processing during operation of this special electric accessory is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process” in step S508 will be described.

Upon entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as a process for continuing the round game. The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the "end interval time (end INT)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as the setting process at the end of the final round, and the special electric accessory is stored. The operation status is switched to "End processing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and refers to the time width in which the ending effect section is defined. ..

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed. The jackpot end command includes information on the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information that can specify the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs after the jackpot game. It is also used when determining the production mode of.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: Fig. 18)
Next, the “big hit end process” in step S509 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot end processing.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S5911: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" already described is set in the flag area and the counter corresponding to the state buffer, respectively. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, the flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game status notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric accessory operation status is set. Switch to "Start processing (00H)".

When the jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is terminated. It should be noted that the series of control processes related to the big hit game described above is the same even when the "forced hit" by the ceiling privilege is given.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 20>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 20, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 19) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is mainly composed of FIG. 20).

<19. Production control side main processing: Fig. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). When the power is turned on from the outside to the gaming machine main body, the effect control unit 24 starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process on the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting processes before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as the process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S01012 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value> 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the effect control side timer interrupt process, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms, and the main loop update counter value is determined in the determination process of step S1002, and when the value is larger than "15" (step). S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed, and in other cases, various effects are performed until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO). The lottery random number is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for error notification during an error and the error cancellation process when the error is canceled are executed. It should be noted that errors related to the effect means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, the demo / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo / power saving mode process, the demo start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the setting process required for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1007). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis process, whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer is monitored, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect process corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interruption process (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interrupt processing, the effect control command is acquired, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, when at least the variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the receive buffer (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command are received and they are stored in the reception buffer. Case), in the command analysis process, one or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on the information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and how long the production time width should be used to display the determined production pattern (parts production), thereby constructing a production scenario and then determining the time schedule. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

Further, for example, when a "hold addition command" is received, an effect process for displaying a look-ahead notice (holding change notice and / or a changing look-ahead notice), a ceiling hold change notice (FIG. 32), or the like is performed. conduct.

After completing the command analysis process, the scenario update process is subsequently executed (step S1009). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect scenario are updated, and the process of advancing the effect scenario is executed based on the timer value. A typical timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the variable period in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (decorative symbol variable period), which is substantially the same as the variable period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (special symbol variable period). This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern appears on the axis, with what time width, and by what kind of effect means. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the occurrence time of one effect arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and each is stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created by the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. NS.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, the phrase, volume, etc. are based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the acoustic control unit. As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp 13 and various LED for effect is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and the decorative lamp unit 45 are created through the light display control unit. Turns on and blinks the LED. As a result, a light effect is realized according to the effect scenario.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the effect software random number update process of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<31. Direction control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt process. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051), and then executes the button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 243. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 19 when displaying information related to a player participation type effect, a menu screen, or a menu item. In this embodiment, it is possible to detect a single press, a long press, repeated hits, and the like.

Next, the effect object operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this effect function operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable body accessory is performed based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body accessory created by the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, the movable body effect by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 19, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU), and an image for the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed. Execute display control. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when displaying an effect based on the RTC information.

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main process on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this process. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Variation example of privilege granting form 1: FIG. 33]
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a big hit during the normal mode (at least the internal gaming state is in the normal state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be, for example, the following imparted forms (α) to imparted forms (ζ).

<Grant form (α): FIG. 33 (a)>
(Α) When the number of executed games is counted regardless of the game mode or the internal game state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big hit. (See Fig. 33 (a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the normal mode (normal state) but also the number of games executed in the time saving mode (time saving state) and the probability change mode (probability change state) are counted. Therefore, it is possible to grant ceiling benefits purely according to how many games have been addicted to from this big hit.

<Grant form (β): Fig. 33 (b)>
(Β) The number of games in the “game state with low probability state (low probability game state)” is counted, and the counted number of games is the predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big hit. ) Is reached, a ceiling privilege will be given. In the case of this example, the number of games executed during the gaming state with a high probability state (high probability gaming state) is excluded from the counting target. Here, the "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and the "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the game mode. "Mode" is applicable.

FIG. 33 (b) typically shows a time-saving jackpot 1 (transition destination game state is time-saving A), a probability variation jackpot 3 (transition destination game state is ST25 mode (probability variation C)), and a probability variation jackpot 2 (transition destination game). The case where the state is ST75 mode (probability change B)) and the probability change jackpot 1 (the transition destination game state is ST100 mode (probability change A)) is applied to this example (granting form (β)) is shown. In the figure, in order to make it easy to compare the three, "a big hit that gives 100 times of electric support" is shown. For each big hit, the number of games required from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as "required game number X" in this example) is as follows.

With reference to FIG. 33 (b), in the case of the time reduction A big hit, the time reduction state is shifted to the time reduction state of 100 times of time reduction after the end of the big hit game, and the time reduction of 100 times is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time saving A" in FIG. 33 (b)).
On the other hand, in the case of a big hit when the ST mode shifts, the number of games from the end of the electric support to the arrival at the ceiling differs depending on the ST mode. Specifically, with reference to "ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in FIG. 33 (b),
In the ST25 mode (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times), the required number of games X is "925 games" because the time reduction number 75 times after the end of ST25 times is counted.
In the ST75 mode (75 ST times + 25 time reductions), the required number of games X is "975 games" because the 25 time reductions after the end of ST75 are counted.
In the ST100 mode (ST count 100 times), the ST mode is in progress for 100 games until the end of the electric support, so these 100 games are excluded from the counting target. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the case of the ST mode, the lower the profitability of the ST mode, the smaller the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the number of ceiling games.

Summarizing the relationships shown in the figure, the relationship of "time reduction A (time reduction number of times 100 times) <ST25 mode <ST75 mode <ST100 mode" is obtained with respect to the above "required game number X". That is, the more the game mode (internal game game state) with a relatively low profit level is shifted, the more the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the ceiling (the number of games required in the normal mode (normal state)). It becomes a peculiar relationship that it decreases. This point that "the number of games required to be played in the normal mode (normal state) is reduced" can be said to be a relief function having a character different from the ceiling privilege.

<Grant form (γ): FIG. 33 (c)>
(Γ) The number of games in a specific variable pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and a ceiling privilege is given when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number without winning a big hit. In order to facilitate the understanding of this example, as a virtual gaming machine, there are two gaming modes, "normal A mode" and "normal B mode", in which the variable pattern selection mode is different as the gaming mode corresponding to the normal mode. An example of a gaming machine capable of transition control between a plurality of types of gaming machine modes including modes will be described. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), for example, the count target is the number of executed games in the "normal B mode". In this case, since the execution game of "normal A mode" is not counted, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how much the game is executed in normal A mode, but it is executed during "normal B mode". When the number of games reaches a predetermined number, the ceiling privilege can be given. The transition conditions between the "normal A mode" and the "normal B mode" (transition conditions for the variable pattern selection mode) include, for example, "cause a mode transition when a small hit is won" or "the number of executed games (number of executed games). Depending on the number of fluctuations), a mode transition occurs. " Using this example, it is possible to create the playability as described in (A) or (B) below.

[(A) Case that causes the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode due to the small hit winning]
A case where the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode is caused by the small hit winning will be described. As an example of this case, for example, when a small hit (winning probability 1/50) is provided on the special figure 1 side and a small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode. To "normal B mode" (shift to normal B mode after small hit game), and to win the small hit again during "normal B mode" (fall lottery), to "normal A mode" Shift (shift to normal A mode after a small hit game). Then, regarding the granting of ceiling benefits, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are addicted without winning a small hit or a big hit in the "normal B mode" (70 games in a row are lost in the normal B mode). If) Ceiling benefits are granted. In the case of this case, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how much you are addicted to in the normal A mode, but the ceiling privilege is given if you are addicted to 70 games in the normal B mode. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel playability in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege granting chance period", that is, a "chance zone", which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of small hits may be provided. For example, when the first small hit is won in the normal A mode, the mode shifts to the normal B mode, and when the second small hit is won in the normal B mode, the normal A is performed. You may shift to the mode. In this case, the first small hit and the second small hit may have different winning probabilities, or may have the same winning probability. In addition, the winning probability of a small hit can be determined according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the first small hit (the small hit that triggers the transition to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the second small hit (the trigger to shift to the normal A mode). If the winning probability of (a small hit) is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. That is, it is possible to create a playability in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling privilege. The probability of winning a small hit, the variable pattern selection mode for counting, and the number of games for which ceiling benefits are given can be appropriately determined in consideration of playability.

[B: Case that causes the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode due to the number of fluctuations]
Next, a case where the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode is caused by the number of fluctuations will be described. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) is executed during the normal A mode, the transition to the "normal B mode" is performed and the "normal B mode" is executed. When the second number of games (for example, 40 games) is executed during the game, the mode shifts to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 400 games), the ceiling privilege is given. In this example, it is possible to reach 400 games, which is the number of games reaching the ceiling, when the mode is changed to the normal B mode 10 times. It should be noted that the number of games reaching the ceiling is not fixed, but a plurality of types of games such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games are provided, and the number of any game can be determined by lottery. You may. In this case, the number of games reaching the ceiling is randomized, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games (400 games), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games (800 games). If the lottery probability is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. In addition, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode, the counting target may be "the number of transitions to the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode". In this case, the ceiling privilege can be given when the number of transitions to the specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Further, a plurality of types of the above transfer times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times, etc.), and any of the transfer times may be determined by lottery (transition number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of transitions (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of transitions (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. In addition, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of executions of the normal symbol variation display game (the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol)" is counted. May be good. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of fluctuations of the normal symbol" in the gaming state accompanied by the low probability state (normal state and / or time saving state). For example, when the number of executions of the normal map variation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and the predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
Further, (ε) it is possible to count the number of "small hits" won in which the condition device does not operate, and to grant the ceiling privilege when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number without winning the big hit. For example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 1/100, and when the winning of a small hit reaches 10 times, a ceiling privilege is given. In addition, instead of the number of times the "small hit" is won, the number of times the special electric accessory is operated (the number of times the small hit game is executed) when the small hit is won may be counted. Further, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times), and any number of times may be determined by lottery (ceiling transition winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of wins (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of wins (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of each winning number is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling, a setting guessing element can be given to the player (the same applies to the "granting form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
Further, (ζ) the number of times of winning “per auxiliary” is counted, and when the predetermined number of times of winning is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of winnings in a gaming state (normal state and / or latent state) accompanied by a state in which the lottery probability per auxiliary is low (normal symbol probability change function is not activated). In addition, instead of the number of winnings of "auxiliary hit", the number of executions of the Fuden open game may be counted.

The above-mentioned grant forms (ε) and (ζ) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (number of symbol variations).

Although it has been described that the ceiling privilege is given when the predetermined number of games (number of ceiling games) is reached with respect to the above-described embodiment, grant form (α) and grant form (β), the present invention is not limited to this. As in the above-mentioned grant form (γ), the number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (lottery for the number of ceiling games). Specifically, a plurality of types of ceiling games can be provided (for example, 500 games, 700 games, 1000 games), and the number of ceiling games can be determined by lottery. In this case as well, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games. Can be determined.

[Modification 2 of the privilege granting form (divided privilege granting form): FIG. 34]
In the first modification of the above embodiment and the privilege granting embodiment, the embodiment in which the ceiling activation trigger is once (the ceiling privilege is granted in the 1000th game) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set a privilege activation opportunity (small privilege grant opportunity) multiple times (at least twice), and grant a large privilege (for example, a profit equivalent to a ceiling privilege) by the small privilege given by each privilege activation opportunity. It can be configured (divided privilege grant form). This modification 2 has a specific gaming state (for example, a normal state (for example, a normal state)) rather than the purpose of "giving a privilege to rescue the player from a large hamari" in that the privilege activation trigger is used a plurality of times. The purpose of "base up in normal mode))) is strong.

As a typical example of this modification 2, for example, an upper limit is set for the number of time reductions given between big hits, and the upper limit number of time reductions is given in a plurality of times. Specifically, a "large privilege (corresponding to a ceiling privilege)" with a finite time reduction of 100 times is given (divided) in four times by a "small privilege" with a finite time reduction of 25 times. Is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of time reductions to be given (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit time reduction number") is X times, the number of grants is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit time reduction number is divided (hereinafter referred to as "division time reduction number") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y: In the following, it may be simply referred to as "Z")
"ΣZk = X k = 1 to Y" ... Equation (10)
Meet. For example, when the upper limit time reduction number X is 100 times and the division grant number Y is 4 times, the total number of division time reductions (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) in the case of granting 4 times before the next big hit is won is 100 of the upper limit time reductions. A time saving state is given so that the number of times (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4 = 100) is reached. The number of division time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of division time reductions, or at least one may be a different number of division time reductions. That is, it may be configured to divide and grant small benefits of the same or substantially the same profit, or may be configured to divide and grant different small benefits. As an example of the former, for example, 25 times of time reduction are divided into 4 times and the upper limit time reduction number is 100 times (the same number of times of division time reduction is given), and as an example of the latter, for example, the first time to the fourth time. The number of division time reductions is set to "20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times" (partially different number of division time reductions) and "15 times, 35 times, 20 times, and 30 times" (different division time reductions, respectively). Number of times) and so on. In addition, as the number of Hamari games increases, a small privilege with a relatively high degree of profit may be given. For example, the number of times of division time reduction from the first time to the fourth time can be set to "10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times".

It should be noted that the values for setting the upper limit time reduction number X, the granting number Y, and the division time reduction number Z can be appropriately determined in consideration of game playability and the like. For example, the upper limit time reduction number X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship of "upper limit time reduction number X> maximum time reduction number due to big hit". However, in order not to give excessive benefits, the upper limit time reduction number X is set to at least "upper limit time reduction number X ≤ maximum time reduction number due to big hit (100 times)" or "minimum time reduction number due to big hit (50 times) ≤ upper limit". It is preferable that the relationship satisfies "time reduction number X <maximum time reduction number by big hit (100 times)".

In addition, there may be a plurality of privilege activation triggers (granting number Y), for example, "what game to grant or when to execute a specific game, regardless of the game state", "specific game". It is also possible to appropriately determine which game of the state should be given, and how many games should be given when the game is executed in a specific game state.

In addition, after the maximum number of time reductions (large privilege) has been granted, no further time reduction status is granted, and the privilege is not granted until the next big hit. After the grant of the big privilege is finished, the privilege is given enough, in other words, it is assumed that the relief function is fulfilled, and the privilege is not given until the next big hit. However, a ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be provided separately. For example, after the division privilege grant is completed, the ceiling privilege can be granted when the predetermined number of games is 1000 games addicted without winning the next big hit. In addition, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to appear in at least one of the plurality of privilege activation triggers. In this case, when the privilege activation opportunity (privilege granting game) arrives, the setting suggestion information can be obtained in addition to the privilege granting, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, here, a configuration in which a finite time reduction is given as a great privilege has been described, but it goes without saying that it can also be applied to a finite probability variation or a finite probability. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time reduction number" is appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" is appropriately read as "probability change state" or "latent probability state", a finite probability change (large privilege) is given separately (small privilege). It is self-evident that it is a concept of a configuration in which a finite probability variation is given multiple times, or a configuration in which a finite latency (large privilege) is divided and granted (a finite probability of a small privilege is granted multiple times). For example, the upper limit time reduction number X may be read as “upper limit ST number X”, the division time reduction number Z may be read as “division ST number”, and the like. As an example, in the above equation (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit ST number) is X times, the number of grants is Y times, and the number of divisions for the upper limit ST number (number of divided STs) is Zk times. When (k = 1 to Y) is set, it may be read as satisfying "ΣZk = X k = 1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: FIG. 34)
This modification (modification example 2) is roughly divided into a "periodic grant form" in which a privilege is given periodically (regularly) such as "a small privilege is given every time a predetermined number of games are executed". There are "aperiodic grant form" that does not periodically divide and grant. First, a periodic grant form will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

[Periodic grant form]
<A. Specific Example 1 of Periodic Grant Form (Grant Form (κ)): FIG. 34 (a)>
FIG. 34 (a) shows an example of a periodic grant form (grant form (κ)). FIG. 34 (a) shows (a) every time a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) are executed during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of the electric support due to the big hit (p0 in the figure). P1, p3, p5, p7) in the figure, and the small privilege "finite time reduction of 25 times of time reduction (25 times of division time reduction)" are given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4, and by granting a total of 4 small benefits, the grant of the large benefit "finite time reduction of 100 times of time reduction (upper limit time reduction of 100 times)" is completed. It shows the case to do.

For details, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the 100 games from the 1st to the 100th games (p1) after the end of the electric support (p0) are controlled to the normal state (period without division), and the 101st game. When the first privilege activation opportunity (privilege grant opportunity) arrives, a finite time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of small benefits is given, and the 25 games from the 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled to the time reduction state. (Controlled to a shorter time by the first small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th game (p3) are controlled to the normal state again (period without division), and the second privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 226th game, and the small privilege is shortened for a finite time. (25 times of time reduction) is given, and the 25 games from the 226th to the 250th games (p4) are controlled to the time reduction state (controlled to the time reduction state by the second small privilege).
Next, during the 100 games from the 251 to 350th games (p5), the normal state is controlled again (period without division), and the third privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 351st game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege (the finite time reduction of the small privilege (p5). (25 times of time reduction) is given, and the time is controlled to the 351 to 375th game (p6) (control to the time reduction state by the third small privilege).
Then, the 376th to 475th games (p7) are controlled to the normal state again, and the final (4th) privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 476th game, and the finite time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of the small privilege is reached. Granted, it is controlled to the time saving state from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (controlled to the time saving state by the 4th small privilege), and with the above, the grant of the big privilege "Limited time saving of 100 times of time saving" is completed. do. That is, small benefits (25 times of time reduction) are given periodically (every 100 games) in 4 divisions, and if 500 games are addicted after the end of the electric support, all of the upper limit of 100 times of time reduction will be given. Become. In other words, such a grant form is the same phenomenon as granting a maximum of 4 sets with the game period of "100 execution games in the normal state + 25 time reductions" as one set, and the limiter function is provided. It can be said that it has a special benefit granting function. Although the effect mode is not shown, it may be in the normal effect mode if it is in the normal state (normal mode) or in the time reduction state (time reduction mode) as in the above embodiment (FIGS. 6 and 7). For example, it may be configured so that the transition control can be performed to the effect mode according to the game state, such as the time saving effect mode (air battle mode).

(When granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration in which the finite working hours are divided and given is described as a big privilege, but the upper limit of the number of working hours is infinite, that is, the "infinite working hours" can be divided and given. When the big privilege is "infinite time reduction", for example, a predetermined number of division time reductions (small privilege) may be permanently granted every 100 games until the next big hit is won. Further, as in FIG. 34 (a), 25 times of division time reduction is given for every 100 games, but an infinite number of times may be given as the number of division time reductions to the 476th game (p7 of the final grant). In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, an infinite probability variation or an infinite latent probability with an infinite upper limit ST number can be divided and given. In this case, as described above, the above-mentioned "time reduction number" may be appropriately read as "ST number of times", and "time reduction state" may be appropriately read as "probability change state" or "latent state".

<B. Specific Example 2 of Periodic Grant Form (Grant Form (κ)): FIG. 34 (b)>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ), a periodic grant form of “dividing the ceiling privilege” has been described. Next, as another form of periodic grant, the profit state granted by winning the jackpot is "infinite time reduction", "finite time reduction", "infinite probability variation", "finite probability variation", "infinite latency", or "finite". A configuration (giving form (λ)) in which "infinity" and the like are divided and given by triggering the privilege multiple times will be described.

In this example, the profits such as the time saving state (infinite time saving, finite time saving), the probability change state (infinite probability change, finite probability change), and the latent probability state (infinite latent probability, finite latent probability) given by winning the big hit are given multiple times. It is a configuration that will be given in installments according to the trigger of the privilege activation. That is, instead of immediately giving the total number of time reductions and the total number of STs after the big hit game as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), the total number of times is given to the small amount over a long game period. It is a structure that goes. In this example, in the case of a time-saving big hit, the number of time reductions given by the big hit corresponds to the "upper limit time reduction number" (large privilege), and the number of time reductions given in division corresponds to the above "division time reduction number" (small privilege). do. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot or a latent jackpot, the number of STs given by the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit ST number" (large privilege), and the number of STs given in installments is the above "divided ST number" (small privilege). Corresponds to. FIG. 34 (b) shows a specific example thereof.

FIG. 34 (b) shows, as a representative example of this example (granting form (λ)), time-saving jackpots α to γ (time-saving jackpots with 50 times of time-savings, finite time-saving jackpots with 100 times of time-savings). The case of winning the infinite time saving jackpot) is illustrated. FIG. (A) shows a case of normal granting without dividing the number of time reductions when the time reduction jackpot of 50 times (corresponding to the time reduction jackpot 2 in FIG. 4) is won, and FIG. When the time reduction jackpot of 100 times (corresponding to the time reduction jackpot 1 in Fig. 4) is won, the case where the time reduction number of 100 times is divided into two times and given in two times (the division time reduction number of 50 times is divided into two times). The case where the time reduction is given in a divided manner) is shown, and FIG. Shows a case where an infinite number of times is given to.

As shown in FIGS. (A) to (C) with reference to FIG. 34 (b), when any of the time-saving jackpots α to γ is won, the number of time-saving jackpots is first won regardless of which jackpot is won. Fifty times are given, and then different game transitions are followed according to the winning jackpot type. Here, as shown in the figure, when the effect mode is set to be common, the playability described below can be created.

(Time saving number of secret games)
When the time-saving big hits α to γ are won, the big hit type won in the effect during the symbol variation display game (such as the notice effect including the decoration stop symbol) and the hit middle effect is kept secret. The effect mode after the big hit game is also a time-saving effect mode (air battle mode: see FIGS. 29 to 31) that is common up to 50 times of the first time reduction (between 1 to 50 games) (sections a0 to p0 in the figure). ), And the 51st to 150th games after that are also common normal effect modes (for example, general effect modes) (sections p0 to p1 in the figure). Therefore, the winning jackpot type is concealed from the production until the 150th game elapses, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting the winning of the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time is the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode is continued after the 151st game (p1 or later), so at this point, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. It will turn out. However, if the winning jackpot is a time-saving jackpot β or a time-saving jackpot γ, a time-saving state occurs in the 151st game, and the game shifts to the time-saving effect mode again. Therefore, at this stage, the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ It is a secret state which of γ was won. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while hoping that the time saving state does not end in 200 games (p2 in the figure) (while expecting the winning of the time saving jackpot γ). Then, if the reduced working hours continue after the 201 game, it is confirmed that the winning jackpot is the reduced working hours γ, that is, the infinite working hours, and the player can proceed with the game under the high base state until the next big hit. Can be done. In this way, by gradually disclosing the number of time reductions in the concealed state, the player's expectation for the continuation of the electric support, the tension of the end of the electric support, and the uplifting feeling when the continuation of the electric support is found are fueled. It is possible to create such a playability (a time-saving concealed game). In the time saving state after the 201 game in which the infinite time saving is known, the normal time saving effect mode (air battle mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time saving effect mode different from the normal time saving effect mode (for example). , A background display (not shown) that is different from the air battle mode may be displayed to definitively notify that the time was infinite.

In the above, the relationship between the three time reduction jackpots α to γ (finite time reduction jackpot with 50 time reductions, finite time reduction jackpot with 100 time reductions, and infinite time reduction jackpot) with different number of time reductions has been described. If there are two different time-saving jackpots, the above-mentioned time-saving number of concealed games can be realized. Further, in the example of FIG. 34 (b), the time-saving jackpots α to γ having different time-saving times have been described, but a plurality of probabilistic jackpots having different ST times (for example, a finite probability-changing jackpot α with 50 ST times and 100 ST times). The same event applies to the finite probability variation jackpot β and the infinite probability variation jackpot γ), and in this case, it is possible to realize a “ST count concealment game” in which the ST count in the concealed state is disclosed step by step.

[Aperiodic grant form]
<Giving form (μ)>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ) (λ), the mode in which the small privilege is given periodically has been described, but the form in which the small privilege is given aperiodically may be used (aperiodic grant). form). For example, the trigger for invoking the privilege is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, the 800th game, and the like. In the case of an aperiodic grant form, a plurality of privilege activation triggers may be determined by lottery, or a plurality of privilege activation trigger scenarios (scenarios in which the number of multiple privilege activation trigger games is predetermined) may be multiple. It may be provided so that one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by lottery. Since other points (matters related to large benefits, small benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-mentioned grant forms (κ) and (λ), detailed explanations will be omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned split benefit granting form, a mode in which the small benefit is split and granted up to the profit of the large benefit has been described. However, it may be configured so that the profit of the big privilege is not the upper limit. For example, the "specific privilege" is given periodically or aperiodically, but the upper limit of the profit to be given is not set. To put it simply, the large privilege is an infinite system privilege (infinite time reduction, infinite probability change or infinite latency), and the small privilege is a finite system privilege (predetermined time reduction number of time reduction states, predetermined ST number of finite probability variation or predetermined ST). The number of times is finite latency), and the small privilege is given periodically or aperiodically until the next big hit without limitation to the number of times Y is given. This example is different from the "divided grant", which has an upper limit, in that the number of grants Y is not limited (the number of grants is infinite). For example, if this example is described with reference to FIG. 34 (a), the small privilege "time reduction of 25 times finite time reduction" is periodically granted (granted every 100 games in the normal state). The grant will not be completed at the time of p8 (4th time), and will be granted permanently until the next big hit. Further, for example, to explain using FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (C), at the time of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be granted to "infinite time reduction", the small privilege "finite time reduction of 50 times reduction" is given. , P2 and later are also given periodically (give every 100 games in the normal state). When the number of grants reaches a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of games, the advantage (profit state) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, to explain using FIG. 34 (a), when the number of grants reaches 10, the "time reduction number of times", which is relatively more advantageous than the current small privilege "time reduction of 25 times finite time reduction", is given. It can be "50 times limited time reduction" (medium privilege). The conditions for switching from the small privilege to the medium privilege may be the case where the predetermined number of grants and / or the predetermined number of games are reached.

The present invention including the technical idea relating to the above-described embodiment and the imparted embodiment (granted embodiments (α) to (μ): FIGS. 33 to 34) relating to the modified example has the following configurations (configuration A) to (configuration A). It can be G).
(Structure A)
A launching means that can launch a game ball into the game area,
When the starting means detects a game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a hit, and a lottery means.
A symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
A gaming machine provided with a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition.
The above-mentioned means of generating a profit state is
When the lottery by the above lottery means is won, the winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of the winning game and the winning game execution control means
After the above-mentioned winning game is completed, the first profit state generating means for generating the first profit state and the first profit state generating means,
A second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific generation condition is satisfied without executing the hit game after the predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(Structure B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
The gaming machine of the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different from each other.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure D)
The profit status of the second profit status is lower than that of the first profit status.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure E)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when the predetermined game period elapses.
The second profit state is started after the specific generation condition is satisfied, then ends once when the predetermined game period elapses, and is restarted when the specific generation condition is satisfied again. ,
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration B, characterized in that.
(Structure F)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when a predetermined number of games have elapsed.
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, and then continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration C, characterized in that.
(Structure G)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when the first game period elapses.
The second profit state is started when the specific generation condition is satisfied, and then ends when the second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and when the specific generation condition is satisfied again, the second profit state is satisfied. 2 Profit status resumes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the above-mentioned configuration A, the above-mentioned configuration C, and the above-mentioned configuration D.

[Second Embodiment]
<Ball ejection performance with electric support>
By the way, in recent years, due to legal demands, it has been required to appropriately suppress the arousal of gambling. In the time saving state or the probable change state, the state with electric support is set, and the control is performed under the high base state rather than the normal state (low base state without electric support). Under this electric support state (high base state), the player is in an advantageous game state in which he / she can aim for the next big hit winning without reducing the number of balls he / she has compared to the normal state. However, if the base value (so-called ball output rate: "safe number of balls / out number of balls" x 100) is lowered excessively in order to suppress the agitation of gambling, the player will be in a state of having electric support. The speed at which the number of balls held is reduced increases, which not only reduces the player's willingness to play, but also results in an increase in the amount of money (consumed amount) used by the player. Will reduce the willingness to play. In particular, when infinite time reduction or infinite probability change is given as a ceiling privilege, most of the players continue the game until the next big hit is won, so the more games until the next big hit win, the larger the number of games. The number of balls you have will also decrease. In other words, the player will face a situation in which the investment amount will increase even during the ceiling privilege, and the motivation for playing will be significantly reduced. In addition, many players continue to play games in an attempt to benefit from the ceiling benefits, so the amount of money spent is increasing, and the significance of the ceiling function as a remedy function is lost. It can also be a source of excitement.

Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to prevent the number of balls held from decreasing extremely. For example, it can be said that it is appropriate from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's willingness to play and gambling, that the ball ejection rate (base value) in the high base state is at least "100% ≤ ball ejection rate". It is preferably "100% ≤ ball output rate ≤ 120% to 130%". A specific configuration for achieving such a high base ball output rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of the present embodiment, as described above, since the player strikes in either "left-handed" or "right-handed" depending on the game state, "left-handed advantage" under no electric support. Therefore, there is a possibility that the general winning openings 43a to 43d (first general winning means) and the upper starting opening 34 (first starting means) belonging to the left flow path 3b will win, but they belong to the right flow path 3c. The general winning opening 43e (second general winning means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second starting means) do not win a prize. On the other hand, if there is an electric support, it is "right-handed advantage", so there is a possibility that the general winning opening 43e and the lower starting opening 35 (special figure 2 starting opening) belonging to the right flow path 3c will win. , The general winning openings 43a to 43d belonging to the left flow path 3b and the upper starting opening 34 (special drawing 1 starting opening) do not win a prize. Further, in a general gaming machine, the ball ejection rate (ball ejection rate at low base) in the state without electric support (normal state or latent state) is approximately 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably less than 100%). The payout rate (high base payout rate) is approximately 80% to 95% in the state with electric support (time saving state or probable change state) (less than 50%), and the payout rate is less than 100% in both cases (less than 50%). If you left it alone). Assuming that the game machine 1 is used, the design value of the expected payout rate is, for example, the general winning openings 43a to 43d (three prize balls) with respect to the average number of winnings per minute in the state without electric support. Are 2, 0.6, 0.4, and 1.04, respectively, and if the upper starting port 34 (4 prize balls) is "5.52", the ball output rate at low base is On the other hand, regarding the average number of winnings per minute in the state without electric support, 12.5 general winning openings 43e (3 prize balls) and 35 lower starting openings 35 (1 prize balls). ) Is 58.2, the ball output rate at high base is 95.7%.

Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which needs to be divided into "left-handed" and "right-handed" depending on the gaming state, the above-mentioned high-base payout rate is set. In order not to reduce it extremely, the layout and prizes of the general winning openings 43a to 43e (3 prize balls), the upper starting opening 34 (4 prize balls), and the lower starting opening 35 (1 prize ball) This can be achieved by devising the number of balls. Specifically, it can be realized by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) Increase the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43e and / or the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening on the normal variable winning device 41 side (starting opening with electric chew)). Specifically, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is set to be larger than the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the general winning opening and the lower starting port 35 belonging to the right flow path 3c is set to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b. For example, the number of general winning openings 43e is four, the number of lower starting openings 35 is two, and the like.

(B) At least increase the number of general winning openings 43e (increase the number of general winning openings belonging to the right flow path 3c from 1 to 2 and increase the number of winnings (winning number / minute) for the general winning openings when hitting right. Raise the bottom). Specifically, the number of general winning openings belonging to the right flow path 3c (number of installations) is larger than the number of general winning openings belonging to the left flow path 3b (number of installations). In the present embodiment, four general winning openings (general winning openings 43a to 43d) belonging to the left flow path 3b are arranged. For example, this is set as one, and the general winning openings 43e belonging to the right flow path 3c are arranged. For example, 2 to 4 pieces, which is more than that.

(C) At least increase the winning rate (ball winning rate) of the general winning opening 43e (for example, increase from 12.5 pieces / minute to 20 pieces / minute). When a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, at least one winning rate is increased. Specifically, it is determined that the entry rate M of the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is higher than the entry rate N of the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b.
In the case of the present embodiment, since a plurality of general winning openings 43a to 43d are arranged, the configuration may be as follows. When the lowest winning rate among the general winning openings 43a to 43d is "Nmin" and the highest winning rate is "Nmax", it is configured to satisfy the following relational expression (Equation 1) or (Equation 2). can do.
(Equation 1) "Nmin <M"
(Equation 2) "Nmax <M"
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the number of general winning openings 43e is one, but when a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following may be configured. When the winning rate of the lowest general winning opening 43e is "Mmin" and the highest winning rate is "Mmax" among the plurality of general winning openings 43e, the following relational expressions (Equation 3) to (Equation 6) ) Can be configured to satisfy any of the above.
(Equation 3) "N <Mmin" (when there is one general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b)
(Equation 4) "Nmin <Mmin"
(Equation 5) "Nmax <Mmin"
(Equation 6) "Nmax <Mmax"

(D) Start INT (interval time until the opening of the movable wing piece 47) and / or end INT (interval time from the end of the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 to the end of the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47) ) Is lengthened (for example, the start INT and / or the end INT is changed from 500 ms to 700 ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls held (increase the ball ejection rate) by so-called "stop hitting", which avoids wasted balls (dead balls) at the time of leaving. For example, the ball ejection rate (BA) can be set to about 95% in the case of leaving the ball untouched, and the ball ejection rate can be set to about 120% in the case of stopping the ball. This stop is particularly effective when the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4).

(E) One or a plurality of small hits that cause a small hit game operation such that the number of balls to be ejected during the small hit game does not increase or the number of balls to be ejected decreases (in the present embodiment, the small hit is provided at least on the special figure 2 side. ). For example, the opening time of the big winning opening is set to a short time (about 0.1 seconds to 1 second), and the "starting INT and / or ending INT (may be the total time of each INT)" which is the closing period of the big winning opening is the second. It is a small hit game operation with a long order (for example, about 1 second to 5 seconds). In such a small hit game, the ball ejection performance is low, and when the game ball is left unattended, the ball ejection may not increase (the ball ejection rate during the small hitting game is 100%), or the ball ejection may decrease. (The ball output rate during the small hit game is less than 100%). In this case, as in the case of (D) described above, if the "stop hit" is used during the start INT and the end INT, the number of balls held can be increased contrary to the ball ejection performance during the small hit game. Therefore, the ball ejection rate can be improved. In particular, if the small hit is won with a high probability (the frequency of small hit games is increased), for example, if the small hit is won at least about 1/5 to 1/20, the effect is further enhanced.

(F) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls in the upper starting port 34. If the number of prize balls on the starting port side, which can be won frequently during electric support, is increased, the stopping effect will increase (the degree of technical intervention will increase), and there is a risk of causing a sense of inequality among players. .. Therefore, it is preferable that the winning opening that greatly affects the payout rate is a winning opening other than the lower starting opening 35 (particularly, a general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c).

(G) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c. There is no difference in the winning rate due to the stop hitting than the number of prize balls in the "lower starting opening 35" where the winning rate is different due to the stop hitting. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to reduce the elements of capture by stopping.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is at least two. If the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the net increase will be 0, and how to make full use of the stoppage by aiming at the opening operation of the lower starting port 35. The player's ball does not increase. Therefore, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to 1, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is set to at least 2. It is possible to improve the ball rate.

In the case of (D) or (E) described above, there is a risk of causing a sense of inequality in the profits earned between those who make full use of the stoppage and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt the above-mentioned configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) relating to the general winning opening having no stopping effect. In particular, the above-mentioned configurations (B), (C), (F) to (H) are effective in reducing the stopping effect and improving the ball ejection rate. Further, the number of the general winning openings belonging to the left flow path 3c or the general winning openings belonging to the right flow path 3c can be one or more.

(Modification example related to model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type model, and may be a model in which the transition mode of the gaming state is defined as follows, for example, the following models (machine 1) to (machine 3).

(Machine 1) "V probability variation type"
If a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided in the large winning opening and one or more specific big hits (for example, probabilistic big hits 1 to 7) are won, the game ball can easily pass through the specific area (passable). ), While it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through a specific area when another big hit (for example, time saving big hits 1 and 2) is won, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (so-called "" Only in the case of "V winning"), a so-called "V probability variation type" model may be used, in which a special symbol probability variation function is activated to shift to a probability variation state or a latent probability state.

(Machine 2) "Fall lottery type"
In the game state (latent state or probability change state) accompanied by a high probability state, a so-called "fall lottery" is performed in each game with a predetermined fall probability, such as a transition lottery from a high probability state to a low probability state (fall lottery). It may be a "lottery type" model. In this fall lottery type, when a fall lottery is won, the winning game (falling game) shifts to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability change function is set to OFF), and the big hit lottery in the winning game is also in a low probability state. It is designed to be drawn at. There are the following cases (A) to (C) as the game state transition form when the fall lottery is won. (A) Probability change state (ST mode) → Time saving state (time saving mode), (B) Probability change state → Normal state (normal mode), (C) Latent probability state (latent mode) → Normal state (normal mode). In such a fall lottery type, in the fall game, the game state is shifted to a gaming state with at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the execution game in the normal state or the time saving state is counted as the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. In addition, except for the fall game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type model described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly "presence or absence of a fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the fall lottery result (fall lottery result). The only difference is the presence or absence of the fall transition control means). Therefore, regarding the game-related matters described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), before winning the fall lottery (in the case of a game state with a high probability state), it can be applied to the embodiment related to the ST mode. After winning the fall lottery (when the fall lottery is won and the game state is shifted to the game state with a low probability state), the embodiment related to the normal state or the time saving state (the game state of the fall transition destination) is set. Applicable.

By the way, the conventional fall lottery type has only one type of fall probability regardless of the big hit type (type of winning symbol), and the game tends to be monotonous, which lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of fall probabilities are provided according to the type of big hit. In this case, each jackpot may have a different fall probability, or some of them may have the same or different fall probabilities. Assuming that the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a "fall lottery type", for example, the probability of falling is set to 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 for probabilistic jackpots 1 to 3 (special figure 1 side). Like 1/240, the jackpots 4 to 7 (special figure 2 side) have different fall probabilities when the jackpot belonging to the special figure 1 side is won, and the same fall probability when the jackpot on the special figure 2 side is won. Can be. Further, as a means for providing a plurality of types of fall probabilities, it is possible to determine the fall probabilities according to the set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, it can be configured so that at least the first set value and the second set value have different fall probabilities. For example, the lower the set value, the higher the fall probability can be set.

Further, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, may be different, or may be partially different. Further, the number of STs can include not only a finite number but also an infinite number. For example, as in the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be 25, 75, 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be 100 or infinite. However, in the case of the fall lottery type, if the fall lottery is won before the number of STs is exhausted, the state will be forcibly shifted to the low probability state (the number of STs will be forcibly set to zero). Further, when the fall lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect at the time of fall) may be enabled by the effect means. In this case, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling can be determined according to the set value.

Regarding the above-mentioned fall lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be used.
(T1)
Acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of types of game information including a first game information (random number for big hit determination) and a second game information (random number for fall determination) based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, FIG. 11). S314: In the case of this example, a random number for jackpot judgment, a random number for special symbol judgment, a random number for fluctuation pattern, and a random number for fall judgment can be acquired).
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding a plurality of types of hits based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means.
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a symbol variation display operation and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the symbol stop display mode.
When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit), the hit game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of the hit game, and
After the winning game is completed, the probability fluctuation control means (S412, FIG. 15, FIG. 18 in FIG. 12) can be controlled to a high probability state in which the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means is higher than the predetermined normal probability. , Fig. 21, Fig. 22),
In the case of the high probability state, the fall lottery means (mainly) for executing the fall lottery as to whether or not to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state based on the second game information (fall determination random value). Control unit 20) and
A gaming machine T including a fall transition control means (main control unit 20) that controls transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won.
The above-mentioned plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit.
When the first hit is won (when the winning game by the first hit is executed) and when the second hit is won (when the winning game by the second hit is executed), the above It can be configured so that the fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means is different.

(T2)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages. In this case, the set value that can be changed in the plurality of stages includes at least the first set value and the second set value, and the first set value and the second set value are configured so that the fall probability is different. be able to.

(T3)
The gaming machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages.
The above-mentioned plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit.
The setting values that can be changed in the above-mentioned multiple stages include at least the first setting value and the second setting value.
It is configured so that the fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means differs between the case where the first hit is won and the case where the second hit is won.
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second hit may not be included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

The gaming machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of gaming states (at least two gaming states including the probabilistic state and / or the latent state among the probabilistic state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, and the normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3), when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won, the setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value can be further provided. ..

(Machine 3) "Limiter mounted type"
When a big hit is won (a specific big hit may be won), it has a limiter function that limits the number of transitions to a high probability state by the probability fluctuation control means to a predetermined upper limit number (limit number of times), so-called ". It may be a "limiter-equipped type" model. This limiter-mounted type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301.

In the case of the limiter-equipped type, the game state after the end of the big hit game is changed to the game state with a high probability state until the number of big hit wins reaches the predetermined limit number (until the number of continuous operations of the conditional device reaches the predetermined upper limit number). It is designed to shift to a probabilistic state or a latent state). For example, if the limit number of times is 5, the game state after the big hit game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big hit to the 4th big hit, and the benefit of the big hit lottery under the high probability state up to 4 big hits. You can receive it. However, when the fifth big hit is won, the "limiter function" starts to operate as the limit number of times is reached (limiter function is ON), and the game state after the big hit game ends is a game state with a low probability state (time saving state). Or it shifts to the normal state). If a big hit is won while this limiter function is operating, the operating limiter function is canceled (limiter function OFF), and the game state after the big hit game ends shifts to a game state with a high probability state until the limit number is reached again. Will be done. In this respect, a limiter machine with a limit of 5 times is also referred to as a "5 times pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one type of limit number of times, and the game tends to be monotonous, which lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the type of big hit. In this case, each jackpot may have a different limit number of times, or a part of it may have a different limit number of times.

For example, the jackpots A to D can be provided, and the limit number of jackpots A to D can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, and 5. In addition, the symbol lottery rate for each jackpot can be set as appropriate. In addition, it can be appropriately determined whether to shift to the probabilistic state or the latent state depending on which big hit is won. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be transitioned to the probabilistic state or the latent state, or only one or a plurality of specific jackpots may be transitioned to the probabilistic state (for example, when the jackpot A is won). Will shift to the probable state, and if the other jackpots B, C, and D are won, it will shift to the latent state). Further, the number of STs is preferably infinite, but the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, may be different, or may be partially different. Further, when the number of STs is finite, even if the number of STs ends and the state shifts to the normal state or the time saving state, the gaming state after the big hit game is again in the high probability state until the limit number is reached. It is possible to shift to a gaming state accompanied by. In addition, among the jackpots A to D, when a specific jackpot is won, the game state (time saving state or normal state) accompanied by the low probability state may be shifted to the gaming state (time saving state or normal state) without shifting to the high probability state, and the time saving state is set. It can be appropriately determined whether to shift to the normal state or to shift to the normal state.

Also in the case of the limiter machine, the matters related to game playability described in this embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34) are applied to the embodiment related to ST mode for the game state accompanied by the high probability state before the limiter number is reached. It is possible, and with respect to the gaming state accompanied by the low probability state after reaching the limiter number of times, it can be applied to the embodiment relating to the normal state and the time saving state (the gaming state after reaching the limit number of times).

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all of the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to individual embodiments. Not limited.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a gaming machine using a gaming ball as a gaming medium has been described, but the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medal as a gaming medium, or a gaming machine that manages information about the gaming medium (such as a prize or a player's ball held by a prize ball) using an electromagnetic recording means (so-called “enclosed”). It may be a gaming machine such as a "type gaming machine (managed gaming machine)").

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable prize device, large prize opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 LCD display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241 and 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM.

Claims (1)

A launching means that can launch a game ball into the game area,
A starting means that can detect a game ball,
When the starting means detects a game ball, a lottery means for drawing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, and a lottery means.
Display means that can display variable patterns and
A gaming machine provided with a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition.
The means for generating a profit state is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit, the hit game execution control means for controlling the execution of the hit game and the hit game execution control means.
After the winning game is completed, the first profit state generating means for generating the first profit state and the first profit state generating means.
After the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the second profit state generation means for generating the second profit state when the specific generation condition is satisfied without executing the hit game is provided.
The specific occurrence condition is different from the case where the number of times the symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times.
The first profit state is a profit state that continues for the first period, and is configured to be granted only once between winning games.
The second profit state is a profit state that continues for a second period shorter than the first period, is configured to be able to be granted multiple times between hit games, and is granted multiple times between hit games. Is also configured so that the total of the second period does not exceed the predetermined period .
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images